JP6476502B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information when a game medium is won in a predetermined winning area is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the player Some are configured so as to be controlled to an advantageous state such as an advantageous specific gaming state.

  Further, as a gaming machine as described above, there is known a gaming machine that hides a pending display so that a change target is not known when performing a pending change effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, a gaming machine is known in which the display mode after the change is changed depending on the possession of the pending change character (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP2015-100507A JP 2012-245158 A

  However, even if the hold display is hidden, there is a problem that the display mode after the change is known by the possession of the hold change character, and the gaming interest is lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents the display mode after the change from being understood and the gaming interests from deteriorating.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like), and a plurality of types of music (for example, FIG. 48 (C ) Shown in FIG. 47), and a variable display (for example, a decorative pattern). A special display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display, etc.) corresponding to a variable display or the like (for example, a winning effect determination process in step S150 for displaying the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H; The variable display effect processing in step S172 for displaying the active display in the active display area AHA), and at least a part of the specific display is difficult or impossible to visually recognize A predetermined effect capable of executing an effect (for example, a concealment effect (for example, refer to FIG. 28 for the effect mode) in which the presence or absence of execution is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 25A in the variable display start setting process in step S171). FIG. 25 shows a first suggestion effect (for example, in the variable display start setting process in step S171) as an execution means (for example, a variable display effect process in step S172) and a suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (B) A second character effect (for example, step S171) different from the first suggestive effect and the large character effect (for example, refer to FIG. 26 for the effect mode) in which the presence or absence of execution is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. Figure 25 small characters demonstration execution presence is determined at decision proportions as shown in (B) (representation embodiment, for example see FIG. 27), etc.) on the variable display start setting process, Viable suggesting demonstration execution means (for example, variable display in effect processing of step S172), wherein the music reproduction unit at the time the music selection, a part of the music to be played in a specific period after the music selection is capable of reproducing a particular portion different from the first portion comprising a (e.g., such that the effect control CPU120 executes the step S628 in FIG. 47), the second suggested Starring unloading as compared to the first suggested effect wherein Ri Contact Te recognized easily Kuna' the display mode after the particular display changes Te (e.g., small character effect shown in FIG. 27, hold display the display mode is changed compared to the large character effect shown in FIG. 26 The display mode of the hold display after the change in the case where the change is made, etc.), the specific display means displays the specific display in a normal mode, and in a special mode different from the normal mode. When displaying And when the predetermined effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the normal mode, than when the predetermined effect is not executed when the specific display is displayed in the normal mode. also, the ratio of second suggested effect is performed is not low (e.g., as shown in FIG. 25 (B), the small characters than when hiding effect is not running when the concealing effect is running The effect is difficult to execute, and according to FIG. 25 (B), when the concealment effect is not executed, the ratio of the small character effect being executed is 15%, whereas when the concealment effect is being executed. The percentage that the small character production is executed is 5% ).

  According to such a structure, it can prevent that the display mode of the specific display after a change is known, and a game entertainment interest falls.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific display means can display the specific display corresponding to each of variable displays, and the suggestion effect execution means changes more than the first suggestion effect. The second suggestion effect can be executed in such a manner that the specific display of the target can be easily recognized (for example, the small character effect shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30B is shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 30A). It is easy to recognize the hold display to be changed when the display mode of the hold display changes compared to the large character effect).

  According to such a structure, it can prevent that the specific display of a change object is known and a game entertainment interest falls.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to carry out concealment effects over a wide range.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment interest over a plurality of variable displays.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the specific display means can change a display mode of the specific display after the end of the predetermined effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating after the end of the predetermined performance.

  (5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times when the predetermined effect is being executed, and the predetermined effect When the predetermined effect is not executed, the ratio at which the suggested effect is executed a plurality of times is made higher than when the predetermined effect is not executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect more when the predetermined effect is not executed than when the predetermined effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 25B, when the concealment effect is being executed, the large character effect or the small character effect is more easily executed than when the concealment effect is not being executed. 25 (B), when the concealment effect is not being executed, the ratio of the small character effect or the large character effect being executed is 30%, whereas when the concealment effect is being executed, the small character effect is small. The rate at which the character effect or the large character effect is executed is 80%).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (7) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (6), the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in response to execution of the predetermined effect, and the specific display The means can display the specific display after the end of the predetermined effect in a manner different from that before the predetermined effect is executed (for example, in (c) of FIG. 26 and (c) of FIG. 26). As shown in FIG. 29, when the on-hold display is in the concealed state, the small character is displayed ((a) in FIG. 29), and then when the on-hold display is in the non-hidden state ((f) in FIG. 29). )), The specific display can be displayed in a different mode (red (“★” in FIG. 29 (f))) before the concealed state (white (“◯” in FIG. 26C))). And the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (8) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), a storage device for storing variable display information that has not yet been started as storage information (for example, the first special figure storage in FIG. 8) 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, etc.), and the specific display means stores the hold stored as the specific display by the hold storage means The hold display corresponding to the stored information can be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8), the specific display means can display a corresponding display (for example, an active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed as the specific display. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), when music is selected, display means capable of displaying an image corresponding to the specific part of the music reproduced during the specific period (for example, FIG. 49 (B) is further provided with an image display device 5 or the like that displays a music-corresponding image in the display area VA1.

  According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  (11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10), for each of the plurality of types of music, storage means for storing a plurality of divided voice data including voice data corresponding to the specific unit (For example, as shown in FIG. 49A, a ROM 121 or the like that stores a plurality of audio data including chorus data), and the music playback means is configured to output audio corresponding to the specifying unit when the music is selected. The specific part of the music is reproduced based on the data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 in FIG. 47), and the music data is reproduced by connecting the plurality of divided audio data in the specific period. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 47).

  According to such a configuration, the burden of data capacity can be reduced.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (11) above,
When an effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) relating to the game is made according to the player's action (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A, player's predetermined action, etc.) Adjustment status display means capable of displaying the adjustment status (for example, volume adjustment status, brightness adjustment status, mode switching status, etc.) is further provided, and the adjustment status display means is in a first state (for example, in a pachinko machine, super reach) In a gaming state other than the production, or in a state waiting for a customer and not displaying an error, in a slot machine, a game state other than a continuous production or a state waiting for a customer or the like and not displaying an error) Regardless of the user's action, the adjustment status is displayed so as to be visible (for example, according to the execution of processing such as step S311 in FIG. The adjustment status is displayed on the image display device 5 and the like, and the first state is different from the first state and executes a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect in a pachinko game machine, a continuous effect in a slot machine, etc.). In two states (for example, a gaming state during a super-reaching effect in a pachinko machine, a gaming state during a continuous effect in a slot machine, etc.), the adjustment state is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized (for example, a diagram by the CPU 120 for effect control). 46, the volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution of the processing in step S614, etc.), and the adjustment status can be displayed based on the player's action until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a stick controller Based on the operation of 31A and the like, the execution control CPU 120 performs processing such as step S348 in FIG. Volume adjustment Te situation wherein the like) to be displayed for a predetermined period in the image display device 5.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

(13) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (12),
Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, a winning number notification effect, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative winning number notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a continuous change number notification, a jackpot music, Name notification, right-handed notification, error notification, effect control CPU 120 for executing promotion effect during jackpot, etc., and the notification effect executing means uses the value of value acquired in the specific period as the notification effect. A first notification effect to notify (for example, a prize ball number notification effect to notify the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit) and a second notification effect to notify the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (E.g., a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit in a continuous game), and the first notification effect and the second notification effect. priority (For example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in the process of step S367 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 61, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.) Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  (14) In order to achieve the above object, another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and variable display (for example, decoration pattern variable) Specific display means (for example, on-hold display, active display, etc.) corresponding to the display, etc. The variable display effect processing in step S172 for displaying the active display in the display area AHA) and concealment means for changing the specific display into a concealed state and a non-hidden state (for example, concealment effect as shown in FIG. 28 is executed) And a suggestion effect (for example, a large character effect, a small character effect, etc.) that suggests a change in the aspect of the specific display. Etc.), and the suggestion effect is executed when the specific display is in the concealed state, after which the specific display is displayed. When the non-hidden state is set, the specific display can be displayed in a mode different from the state before the hidden state (for example, FIG. 29 (c) and FIG. 29 following FIG. 26 (c)). As shown in FIG. 29, when the hold display is in a hidden state, the small character is executed ((a) in FIG. 29), and then when the hold display is in a non-hidden state ((f) in FIG. 29), The specific display can be displayed in a different mode (red (“★” in FIG. 29 (f))) before the concealed state (white (“◯” in FIG. 26C))) ).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (15) In the gaming machine of the above (14), a storage unit that stores the variable display that has not yet been started as a storage unit (for example, the first special figure storage unit 151A, the second special figure storage unit in FIG. 8) 151B, a reception command buffer 194A at the time of start winning in FIG. 10B), and the specific display means displays a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means as the specific display. It is possible.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  (16) In the gaming machine of the above (15), the specific display means can further display a variation corresponding display (for example, an active display) corresponding to the already started variation display as the specific display. It is characterized by.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio regarding change productions, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio regarding a concealment effect and a character effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a volume condition display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot music determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the music which can be reproduced | regenerated during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the data which can be reproduced | regenerated during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary display process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of no volume change operation in a super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of volume change operation in a super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution timing of the volume condition display in a super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution timing of a volume condition display when there is volume change operation just before the start of super reach production, or just before completion. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process at the time of attacker opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a probability change confirmation alerting | reporting effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball number notification effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous change frequency alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot music name alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of various alerting | reporting images. It is a figure which shows an example of a Z value setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of a prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, a cumulative prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of a probable change confirmation alerting | reporting effect, a prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, a continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and a jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of error alerting | reporting, prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of error alerting | reporting, a probable change confirmation alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and the jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlap.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory is provided to form a second start winning opening as a start area. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  The game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  Note that a game ball that has passed through a winning opening such as a start winning opening or a grand winning opening is detected by a switch provided corresponding to each winning opening is referred to as “winning”. Of the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning opening is referred to as “starting winning”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning, and winning at the second starting winning opening is second started. This is called winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the first special figure holding storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the first special symbol display device 4A executes. A first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols executed in the image display device 5 is established.

  Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as winning balls, and if the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, it is executed in the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols executed in the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning prize but are temporarily held for execution. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the above-mentioned by the occurrence of the first start prize If the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied, the execution of the variable display game is suspended. That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored as pending data until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games that are not immediately executed when the second start winning is generated but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for fulfilling the variable display game such as the second special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the above-mentioned by the occurrence of the second start prize If the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied, the execution of the variable display game is suspended. In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize The information regarding is stored as pending data until the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. In the case where the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. That is, when simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”, one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number Or it may refer to three. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area in the game board 2. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass and an open state in which a game ball can pass. Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. To change.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. The game ball that has passed through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the first starting prize, and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the second starting prize. More than the number. In other words, it greatly affects whether or not the state of the special winning opening is advantageous to the player.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. 4A of 1st special symbol display apparatuses display the special symbol which is a multiple types of identification information which can identify each so that a change is possible. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "special diagram 1", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "second special symbol". Also referred to as “Special Figure” or “Special Figure 2”. A game that is executed with variable display of identification information is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a first special graphic game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a second special graphic game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like as a special symbol game. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to the special symbol.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and a first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number based on the hold data in an identifiable manner is performed. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and a second hold display that displays the second special figure hold memory number based on the hold data so as to be specified is performed.

  Note that when there is no particular distinction between the first hold display and the second hold display, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”. In addition, the expression “pending display” may refer to the operation itself as well as the display itself. For example, the hold display when it is said that a hold display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to “hold display” in the start winning memory display area 5H and “active display” in the active display area AHA.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of stored general symbols is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the normal game executed on the normal symbol display 20 is executed. The usual chart start condition is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols, in a variable manner. Note that a variable display game for variably displaying normal symbols is also called a general game. Note that information regarding the general game in which the general chart start condition is satisfied but the general map start condition is not satisfied is stored as pending data.

  The general-purpose hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays a general-purpose hold storage number based on the hold data by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol change is started in conjunction with the special symbol game, and the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5L is also referred to as the left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5C is also referred to as the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5R is also referred to as the right symbol. The variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of special-games held increases due to the establishment of a new start condition, a new hold display may be added so that the game is digested in order from the left end of the start winning storage display area 5H. When the number of held special figure games decreases due to the establishment of a new start condition, the held display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is deleted, and when there is another held display, another held display is displayed. Move to the left.

  An active display area AHA is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the active display area, the active display is performed based on the fact that the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 5H is moved to the active display area AHA when the start condition is satisfied, and the active display is displayed. Hereinafter, an active display that is displayed based on the fact that a certain hold display M is deleted may be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged on the left side of the start winning storage display area 5H, but the active display area AHA is one of the display areas of the image display device 5. What is necessary is just to be arrange | positioned in the position.

  An upper plate and a lower plate are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body. The member that forms the upper plate is provided with a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a speaker 8UL and a speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a speaker 8LL and a speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right sides of the upper plate. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are simply referred to as speakers 8 unless particularly distinguished from each other.

  A movable accessory that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a movable accessory 17 that can move from a first position to a second position is provided at an upper position of the image display device 5.

  In addition, light emitting members that emit light as effects or decorations are provided in and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 17, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is placed on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as a lamp 9.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17 described above are effect devices that perform effects. However, the gaming machine 1 may include other devices such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower unit. An effect device may be provided.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the normal game, after the start of variable display of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special game is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the second special figure game is started. In the special figure game, when the variable display time as the special figure variation time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, a fixed special symbol that is a variable symbol variable display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be “lost”. . If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols in the first special game and the second special game may be used as the jackpot symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state is an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round that is advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round. For example, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, changes the grand prize opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the grand prize opening in the open state, and then closes the grand prize opening door. The grand opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed. In the round, the grand prize opening is in an open state until either a predetermined upper limit opening time elapses after the grand prize opening door is opened, or a predetermined number of prizes are generated in the grand prize opening. Maintained.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot gaming state until the number of rounds reaches a predetermined upper limit. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may end the execution of the round when the predetermined condition is satisfied, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the predetermined upper limit. The predetermined upper limit number is two types in the present embodiment, but may be one type or may be three or more types.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the special game. In addition, there may be a reach state during a period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to stop display of fixed decorative symbols. The reach state is a display in which variation continues for decorative symbols that are not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination. This is a state, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The production in the reach state is called reach production.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be varied.

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot for a certain performance is, for example, (probability that the performance will be executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability of that performance being executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of becoming a big hit) + (Probability that the effect will be executed at times other than the jackpot) × (Probability that the jackpot will not be hit)}. In addition, when a certain effect is executed and “big hit” is always obtained, the big hit expectation degree of the effect is “1”. The same applies to the degree of superreach expectations for a certain performance.

  Reach production is an effect that informs and suggests to players that the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, but in addition to the reach production, Pachinko machine 1 also informs the player that the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, The suggestion can be performed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute an effect that notifies or suggests to the player that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is executed. In the following, there is a case in which any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or the effect that predicts or suggests to the player that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high is collectively referred to as the notice effect.

  The notification by the notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notification content is realized. For example, the notice effect that notifies the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed as long as it is performed before the reach state is reached. In addition, the notice effect that notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” may be performed before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The notice effect may only include a pre-read notice effect. The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result is a “hit” before starting the variable display subject to the notice based on the hold information of the special figure game, etc. This is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is the target. Is also referred to as a variable display. The active display corresponding to the target hold display is also referred to as target active display.

  The display mode of active display may be determined at the time of winning a prize, may be determined at the time of hold display, or may be determined when active display is performed. The display mode of the hold display and the active display mode corresponding to the hold display may be the same or may be related to each other. The display mode is the same as, for example, that an active display having the same or substantially the same display mode as that of the hold display before erasure is displayed.

  The display modes are related to each other, for example, there are three types of display modes (expectation level of display mode a> expected level of display mode b> expectation level of display mode c) as the display mode of hold display. In addition, three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations as active display modes (expected degree of display mode s> expected level of display mode t> expected level of display mode u, where display mode s is display mode a, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b, and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b, and c). When the hold display is erased, the active display of the display mode s is displayed, when the hold display of the display mode b is erased, the active display of the display mode t is displayed, and when the hold display of the display mode c is erased It is that the active display of the display mode u is displayed. In addition, when an after-addition active display effect is executed, when the hold display of the display mode a is deleted, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the hold display of the display mode b is deleted. When activated, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as a pre-reading advance notice effect, a hold effect according to the display mode of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H can be executed. The hold effect includes, for example, an effect of displaying the hold display added to the start winning memory display area 5H in a notice mode different from the normal form, an effect of changing the already displayed hold display to the notice mode, and the like. .

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that is executed when the hold display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to directly or indirectly display the hold display. The effect which makes it act can be performed. In addition, the effect that is executed when the action effect and at least a part of the effect mode are common and the hold display is not changed to the notice mode may be executable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be executable as the notice effect. The active display effects include, for example, an effect in which an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode when a hold display at the time of erasure is in a normal form, or an active display that is displayed in a normal form is notified in advance. An effect or the like to change the aspect is included. In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the hold change effect and the active display change effect, it may be referred to as “change effect such as hold”.

  When the active display effect can be executed, the action effect is executed when the active display is changed to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to directly display the active display. It may be an effect that acts indirectly or indirectly. In addition, when the active display effect is executable, the action display effect is an effect that is common to the action effect and at least a part of the effect mode, and is an effect that is executed when the active display is not changed to the notice mode. May be.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the concealment effect which conceals the hold display in the start winning memory | storage display area 5H can be performed. The concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold display. For example, the concealment effect may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the hold display to such an extent that even the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H cannot be recognized at all. Moreover, although the number of the hold display currently displayed on the start winning memory | storage display area 5H can be recognized somehow, the effect which makes the visual recognition of each display mode difficult or impossible may be sufficient. Moreover, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes the number difficult to view or impossible. For example, the presence or absence of a hold display in a certain display mode may be notified. Moreover, in the case of the hold display in which the notice mode is expressed in part rather than the whole, the concealment effect makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. It may be an effect.

  Further, the concealment effect may conceal the active display in the active display area AHA instead of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed among the special symbols serving as jackpot symbols as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. Is an “8R probability variation big hit” which is an aspect of “big hit”. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. After the end of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit, the probability variation control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed when a special ST game is executed a predetermined number of times after the big hit gaming state is finished, or when one of the conditions is established first when the variable display result is “big hit”. To finish. Therefore, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is terminated when the special game of the predetermined number of STs is consumed. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

  In addition, by performing the time reduction control, the variable symbol display time in the special figure game is shortened compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first. To finish. Therefore, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction control ends when the special time-limited number of special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is 70, for example.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display time on the normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 20 is shorter than the time when the time reduction control is not performed, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each time of the normal game is displayed. Control for improving the probability of “per normal figure” as compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass through the second start winning opening, such as a control for making the tilt control time for performing the time longer than when the time reduction control is not performed, and a control for increasing the number of tilts compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is next. Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability variation state. The short-time state and the high-accuracy state are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A gaming state in which time-shortening control or high-opening control is performed together with probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is both highly accurate and in a high base state is also referred to as a highly accurate and high base state or a time-variable probability varying state. A gaming state in which only time-varying control is performed and time-shortening control or high-opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state that is in the high-accuracy state but not in the high-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state or a short-time indeterminate variation state The Note that only the high-accuracy high-base state may be referred to as a “probability change state”. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed without the probability changing control, that is, the gaming state that is not in the high probability state but in the high base state is also referred to as a low probability high base state. A gaming state in which neither the time-varying control nor the high opening control is performed without the probability changing control, that is, the gaming state that is neither the high-probability state nor the high-base state is also referred to as a low-probability low-base state. The low-accuracy low base state is a normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time-shortening control nor the high open control is performed, so it is distinguished from the high-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high-base state, etc. It may be referred to as “normal state”. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state.

  In this embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed when the special game of the predetermined number of STs is consumed. However, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result is “big hit” without providing the ST count. That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided in which probability variation control is continued until the next big hit. When the probability variation big hit that continues the probability variation control until the next big hit is provided, a normal big hit that is not subjected to the probability variation control after the end may be further provided.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 11 controls turning on / off of each LED constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control variable display of the first special diagram and the second special diagram. And a function for controlling variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling normal variable display of the normal symbol display 20 by performing on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 and the like. ing.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. 9 and various circuits for controlling the production operation by the movable accessory 17 and the like are mounted.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit to perform is mounted. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling the action of an accessory provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on a command, control data, or the like from the effect control board 12. A circuit for outputting a drive signal is mounted on the actuator.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Note that the gaming machine 1 may include other switches connected to the main board 11 in addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. The wiring which transmits the command signal for performing display control of these etc. is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, and the first byte indicates MODE and the second byte indicates EXT. The first bit of MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or may be three or more. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each presentation control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer as a setting for transmitting the effect control command. Stored in the buffer area. Thereafter, the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing a command control process of the game control timer interrupt process.

  A part of FIG. 3A will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of the first special figure game. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decoration symbol variably displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command B100H is a first start opening winning notification command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B200H is a second start opening prize notification command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory count. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number. For example, when the first start winning is generated, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted together with the first start opening winning notification command. Further, when the second start winning is generated, a second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted together with the second start opening winning notification command.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as a winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command that indicates a variation category determination result as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the decorative pattern variation patterns are classified by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process, when a start winning occurs, the variation category is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category except in some cases. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 displays the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start prize is generated. Or not.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 102 that provides a game control work area. The CPU 103 is configured to execute a game control program to perform a control operation, the random number circuit 104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and the I / O 105.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating part or all of the random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” and “PA2-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the variation category “PB1”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  A part of FIG. 5 will be described. For example, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (losing) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed twice.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 is for determining the special figure display result based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result before the variable display result of the special figure game is derived and displayed. It is a table to be referenced. In the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, the number of determination values assigned to each special figure display result varies depending on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. According to the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determination values are assigned to “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. In other words, the probability of “big hit” is increased when the state is highly accurate compared to when the state is low.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7 determines whether the jackpot type is to be one of a plurality of types when determining to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It is a table referred in order to determine based on the random value MR2. In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, the number of determination values assigned to each jackpot type varies depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. . According to the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a larger number of determination values is obtained than when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure. Assigned to. That is, in the second special figure game, the probability of being “16R probability variable big hit” is higher when the “big hit” is obtained than in the first special figure game.

  The ROM 101 also includes a variation category determination table that is referred to for determining a variation category as one of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern that is referred to for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. A decision table is stored.

  The RAM 102 holds various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control data holding area provided in the RAM 102. For example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided in the RAM 102 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a hold specific information storage unit 151C, a general figure hold storage unit 151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores hold data of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A indicates the random number value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in association with the reservation number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. Numerical data is stored as pending data until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value.

  The second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores hold data of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B indicates the random number value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening. Numerical data is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value.

  The holding specific information storage unit 151C is a winning order of the entire holding data including the holding data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the holding data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B. In association with the hold number, information indicating whether the hold data is based on the occurrence of the first start win or the hold data based on the occurrence of the second start win is stored. In the hold specific information storage unit 151C illustrated in FIG. 14, “first” indicates that it is first hold information, and “second” indicates that it is second hold information.

  The usual figure hold storage unit 151D stores the hold information of the usual figure game. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151D determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. A second reserved memory number count value that is a stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, a total reserved memory number count value that is a stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, and the like. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number which updates the numerical data which shows a random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for effect control A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC circuit 126 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 is provided with wiring for transmitting an information signal indicating an effect image for the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting an information signal indicating an instruction for the sound control board 13, and an instruction for the lamp control board 14. Wiring or the like for transmitting the information signal shown is connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and the player's operation action on the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal indicating the detection from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of effect control patterns used for the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices. Each effect control pattern is configured by data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various production operations are realized by setting production control patterns. For example, the decorative display variable display operation corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. The hold effect, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game, the ending effect, etc. are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is a control for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer, and is the execution time of each effect operation. Corresponding judgment values are set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. In other words, data indicating the switching timing of the production control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the push button 31B is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating the operation mode of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 17. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. In the effective period, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data may be set in the data corresponding to the rendering device that is not the control target even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation corresponding to a part of the period may be provided. Alternatively, an effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during the variable display of decorative symbols may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 advances the control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n included in the effect control pattern. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with effect control process timer determination value # 1 to effect control process timer determination value #n, audio control Data # 1 to voice control data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data # n indicates the control content of the rendering operation in each rendering device, and configures rendering control execution data # 1 to rendering control execution data #n that designates execution of rendering control.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. Let On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  FIG. 10A is a block diagram or the like showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122. For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A is provided in the RAM 122 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The reception command buffer 194A at the time of a start winning prize is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories. When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, one set of four commands, a start opening prize designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command, is set. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start area winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area every time variable symbol display is started. The stored contents of are shifted.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the prefetch notice buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The prefetch notice buffer 194B is provided with a storage area corresponding to each data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the prefetch notice buffer 194B, the determination contents regarding the prefetch notice effects related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. For example, when the pending data associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning reception command buffer 194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., it is associated with the buffer number in the prefetch notice buffer 194B. Deleted contents are also deleted. In addition, when the pending data associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start winning reception command buffer 194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, the prefetch notice buffer 194B The contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S12, the CPU 103 executes predetermined information output processing, for example, jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Are output (step S13).

  Following the information output process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number update process in step S14, for example, at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 by software.

  Following the game random number update process in step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol process (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process, the display operation of the normal symbol display 20 is controlled to enable variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like.

  Subsequent to the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing to the off state, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). If it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure holding memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. (Step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  When it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 sets the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 to “ 1 "is set (step S207). Subsequent to the process of step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (step S208), and sets “0” to the start port buffer value (step S209).

  If it is determined in step S201 that the first start-up switch 22A is not on (step S201; NO), or if it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure hold memory number has reached the upper limit value ( Step S202; YES) After executing the processing of Step S209, the CPU 103 detects the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203). If it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure holding memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. (Step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  When it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 sets the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 to “ 2 "is set (step S210). Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (step S211), sets “0” to the start port buffer value (step S212), and ends the start winning determination process.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is not ON (step S203; NO), or when it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204; YES), the start winning determination process is terminated without performing the processes of Steps S210, S211, and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, even if the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B detect the start winning of the game ball at the same time, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process. In the start winning process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value by 1 (step S <b> 215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B. In addition, information corresponding to the start port buffer value is stored in the hold specific information storage unit 151C.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a start port winning notification command corresponding to the start port buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is performed. The start opening winning notification command set in step S219 is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. It is transmitted to the control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S220). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first reserved memory number notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second reserved memory number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process is terminated. It should be noted that the reserved memory count notification command set in step S221 is executed by, for example, executing the command control process of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, etc. To the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a winning random number determination process. In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 15A, the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies whether or not the game state is a big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that it is a big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and specifies that it is not a big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on. Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is on, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not on. Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 may identify whether the state is the high-predicted state or the low-predicted state by confirming the state of the high-predictive flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 may specify that the high-accuracy flag is on when the high-accuracy flag is on, and may specify that the low-accuracy state is on when the high-accuracy flag is not on.

  The CPU 103 sets the high base flag to the on state in the big hit end process. Further, the CPU 103 clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process. For example, the CPU 103 sets zero, which is an initial value, to a variation counter that is compared with the number of time reductions in the jackpot ending process, updates the variation counter when the loss occurs in the special symbol stop process, and changes the variation counter. When the value of reaches the number of times, the high base flag is cleared to the off state. Further, the CPU 103 sets the high-accuracy flag to the on state in the big hit end process. In addition, the CPU 103 clears the high-accuracy flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process. For example, the CPU 103 sets zero, which is an initial value, to the variation counter that is compared with the ST count in the jackpot end process, and updates the variation counter when the loss occurs in the special symbol stop process and the variation counter When the value of reaches the high accuracy count, the high accuracy flag is cleared to OFF state. Note that the value of the variation counter is stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  Following the processing of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game state is a big hit gaming state in the process of step S401. When it is determined in step S402 that the game state is not the big hit game state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S401.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the game state is a big hit game state (step S402; YES), or if it is determined in step S403 that the base state is a high base state (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value. Is determined to be “2” (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning. When it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; NO), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not in the high base state (step S403; NO), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404; YES), the CPU 103 Then, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state is set (step S405). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data for the low-accuracy state from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 when not in the high-accuracy state, and displays the display shown in FIG. 6 when in the high-accuracy state. From the result determination table 130, table data for the high-accuracy state is set. Note that the CPU 103 may specify that the high-accuracy flag is in the on state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and may specify the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not on. Further, when different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table is used to If the buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, the CPU 103 determines that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not there is (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with each determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 determines the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination values assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result in the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. And the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 may be determined as to whether or not the value is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  When it is determined in step S406 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S406; YES), the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S217 of the start winning time process shown in FIG. 14 is shown. The big hit type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot type determination table in accordance with the fluctuation special map specified by the start port buffer value. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data corresponding to the fluctuation special map from the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 103, for example, compares the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type with the determination values for the respective big hit types in the big hit type determining table data set in accordance with the variation chart. Thus, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 may be determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S406; NO), a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S406). S409). The symbol designation command set in step S409 is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. It is transmitted to the control board 12.

  After executing the process of step S408 or the process of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base state is set (step S410). If it is determined in step S410 that it is not the high base state (step S410; NO), the CPU 103 sets a variation category determination table for the low base state according to the special figure display result (step S411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S410 that the state is the high base state (step S410; YES), the CPU 103 sets the high base state variation category determination table corresponding to the special figure display result (step S412). .

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 16A shows a selection example in which one of the variation category determination tables is selected from a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 16A, when the special figure display result is “lost” in the low base state, three types of variable category determination tables are selected according to the number of reserved storage.

  FIG. 16B shows a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the high base state. According to FIG. 16B, when the special figure display result is “lost” in the high base state, two types of variable category determination tables are selected according to the number of reserved storage.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. FIG. 17A is the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  For example, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determined values of the random value MR3 are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, and 70 vary. 27 are assigned to the category “PA3”, 2 are assigned to the category “PA4”, and 1 is assigned to the category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0%, the variation category “PA2” is 70%, the variation category “PA3” is 27%, The category “PA4” is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1%.

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL2” illustrated in FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” illustrated in FIG. 17C, and the variation category determination table “C” illustrated in FIG. -TBL4 "and the variation category determination table" C-TBL5 "shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of step S411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not determined in step S410, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” in step S406, and the variable category determination table. If the table data constituting “C-TBL4” is set, and it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variable category determination according to the number of reserved storage Table data constituting any one of the tables “C-TBL3” is set. In step S412, which is executed when it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is set, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” in step S406. When the table data constituting the determination table “C-TBL5” is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” or the variation Table data constituting any of the category determination table “C-TBL3” is set.

  After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the change category extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14, and the change category set in step S411 or step S412. It may be determined which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the determination table. Subsequent to the process of step S413, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result of the process of step S413. After that (step S414), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal processing includes processing for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting processing includes processing for determining a variation pattern, setting processing for transmitting a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation start command, and the like. In the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process determines whether the special symbol is varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and whether the elapsed time after the start of the variation has reached the special symbol variation time. Processing. In the special symbol variation process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3” when the elapsed time after the variation starts reaches the special symbol variation time.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process is a process in which the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, or when the big hit flag is off As a process to be executed at the same time, a process for changing the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting process for transmitting a hit start designation command as a process to be executed when the big hit flag is on, and the like are included. In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and when the big hit flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Is updated to “4”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit pre-opening process includes a process for making a setting for making the big winning opening open, a setting process for sending a notification command for opening the big winning opening, and the like. In the big hit release pre-processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big prize opening has passed a predetermined time, whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number, etc. Processing to determine the timing to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state, processing to set the big winning opening to the closed state, setting processing to send a notification command etc. after opening the big winning opening, etc. Contains. In the big hit release processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After the big hit opening process, the process of determining whether the number of executions of the round with the grand prize opening in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening is not reached Includes processing to execute a notification command during the opening of a special winning opening as processing to be executed, processing processing to transmit a hit end designation command as processing to be executed when the maximum number of opening of the special winning opening has been reached, etc. It is out. In the post-hit opening process, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the maximum number of times of winning the big winning opening, the value of the special process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process of step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is based on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a process for determining whether or not the jackpot end stage waiting time has elapsed or a process to be executed when the jackpot end stage waiting time has elapsed. It includes a process for setting the state, a process for setting the ST count and the time reduction count, and the like. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  Further, the big hit release processing, the big hit release post-processing, the big hit release pre-processing, and the big hit release end processing include transmission settings for transmitting a big winning opening winning notification command when the count switch 23 is turned on.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved storage is “0” (step S230). For example, in the process of step S230, the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” in step S230 (step S230; NO), it is determined whether or not the first reserved data is second reserved information (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, it is determined whether or not the information stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the hold specifying information storage unit 151C is information indicating that the hold information is the second hold information. What is necessary is just to judge.

  When the hold data digested first in step S231 is the second hold information (step S231; YES), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the unit 151B is shifted higher by one entry (step S233). In the process of step S233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter by one. Subsequent to the processing in step S233, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the hold data first digested in step S231 is not the second hold information (step S231; NO), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the unit 151A is shifted up by one entry (step S237). In the process of step S237, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. Following the processing of step S237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 sets a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set a special figure display result determination table in the same manner as in step S405 of the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, the CPU 103 determines the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and the special figure display result set in step S239, as in step S406 of the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. The special figure display result may be determined by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the table data.

  Following the process of step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is a “hit” (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that the game is a “hit” (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state (step S242). Note that the big hit flag is cleared to the off state in the big hit end process of step S117. Subsequent to the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a big hit type determination process (step S244). The jackpot type determination process in step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S244, the CPU 103 stores the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, for example, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244. A jackpot type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is stored. As an example, if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process in step S244 is “16R probability variable big hit”, the CPU 103 sets “1” in the big hit type buffer value, and if “8R probability variable big hit”, the big hit type Set “2” to the buffer value.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; NO), or after executing the process of step S245, the CPU 103 displays the special figure display result determined in the process of step S240, In this case, a confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the process of step S244 (step S248). After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

  When the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S230 (step S230; YES), the demonstration display setting is executed, and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. It is determined whether or not there is. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation category and selects a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the determined variation category, in the same manner as the processing in step S413 of the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. Then, the variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when determining the variation category “PA2”, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA2” shown in FIG. 19B, and sets a random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. When the numerical data shown is within the range of “0” to “39”, the variation pattern “PA2-1” is determined, and when the numerical data is within the range of “40” to “99”, the variation pattern “PA2-2” is determined. . Further, for example, when the variation category “PA3” is determined, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA3” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating is in the range of “0” to “79”, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of “80” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is determined. To do. The same applies when other variable categories are determined.

  The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the processing, or similar to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random number value MR5 is extracted in step S217 of the start winning time processing and stored data And may be read in step S232 of the special symbol normal process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value for the ST number and the setting value for the time reduction number are set to the same value, but the setting value for the ST number and the setting value for the time reduction number may be set to different values. Good. In this embodiment, the setting value of the ST count in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot and the setting value of the ST count in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value. However, the setting of the ST count in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot is set. The value may be different from the set value of the ST count in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value, but the setting of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit is set. The value may be different from the setting value of the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit. Further, when the setting values of the ST count and the short-time count are not different between the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the case of 16R probability variation big hit, the processing of step S312 may be omitted.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. The registered CTC registers are set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte and the second byte are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  When it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S73). Command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  Subsequent to the command analysis processing in step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes error notification processing (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control process processing (step S76). In the effect control process in step S76, determination, determination, setting, and the like regarding effect operations using various effect devices are performed based on the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

  Subsequent to the effect control process in step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process (step S77). In the effect random number update process in step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  It has been described that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 on the side of the effect control board 12 is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, the method for generating an interrupt for receiving a production control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). When it is determined that there is no received command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  When it is determined in step S501 that there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a first start opening prize notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may confirm the MODE data of the received command, for example, and specify the type of the received command.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value set in advance as the reception waiting time for the first reserved memory number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is not the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a second start opening prize notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second start opening prize notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value, which is set in advance as a reception waiting time for the second reserved memory number notification command, in the command reception control timer.

  When it is determined in step S504 that the command is not the second start opening prize notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that the command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the command is not a variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a first reserved memory number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the first pending storage count notification wait time Is cleared (step S509).

  When it is determined in step S508 that the command is not the first reserved memory number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command. (Step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the second pending storage count notification waiting time Is cleared (step S511).

  If it is determined in step S506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S506; YES), or if it is determined in step S507 that it is a variable category command (step S507; YES), step S503, step S505, step S509 After executing any of the processes in step S511, the effect control CPU 120 stores the reception command at the head of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S512). Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that it is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to other received commands (step S518). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the gaming state designation command and specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored content in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, or determines whether or not a start opening winning notification command is received as a received command. The process etc. which determine regarding various productions are performed.

  Following the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. .

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. The variable display start waiting process is a variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command, variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. The process etc. which determine whether to start are included. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process performs setting for performing variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. This includes processing, processing for setting for performing display operation such as hold display, active display, and the like. In the variable display start setting process, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. The variable display effect process includes a process of determining whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S171) has timed out. In the effect processing during variable display, when the variable time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special symbol waiting process is executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is “losing”, when the game state setting process at the time of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, or when the fixed decorative symbol is “big hit” The process to be executed includes a process for making a setting for performing a fanfare effect. In the waiting process per special figure, when the confirmed decorative symbol is “losing”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, and when the confirmed decorative symbol is “big hit”, Update the value to “4”.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process for determining whether or not a special winning opening open notification command has been received, and a setting for performing an opening effect as a process to be executed when a special winning opening open notification command is received. Processing. In the big hit starting process, when the big prize opening opening notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The process during the round is a setting for performing the closing effect as a process for determining whether or not a notification command after opening the big prize opening has been received or a process to be executed when the notification command after opening the big winning opening is received. Processing. In the in-round processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” when the notification command after the special winning opening is received is received.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. Post-round processing is performed as a process for determining whether or not a winning prize opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, or a process to be executed when a winning prize opening notification command is received. For example, a process for performing an ending effect as a process to be executed when a hit end designation command is received. In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” when a notification command during opening of a special winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” when a winning end designation command is received. To do.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. The post-hit end post-process includes a process for determining whether or not the ending effect execution time timer set in the post-round process has timed out. In the post-hit end processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of winning effect determination processing. In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S151), and uses the first start opening winning designation command as a new received command. Is determined (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second start opening prize designation command as a new reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S154). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is short (step S155). When it is determined that the time is not short (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S160). The process for determining the hold effect, etc. in step S160 includes a process for determining the hold effect, the active display effect, the action effect, the action gaze effect, the concealment effect, and the like. Details will be described later.

  After executing the hold effect etc. determination process, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the hold effect etc. determination process (step S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the contents of the determination process of the hold effect and the like in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194B corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. Remember.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 adds a new hold display to the start winning storage display area 5H based on the determination content stored in step S161 (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses an effect control pattern for displaying the hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described prefetch notice buffer 194B in the start winning memory display area 5H. Determined in the hold effect determination process by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition is added to the start winning storage display area 5H. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command is received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is short (step S156). When it is determined that the time is short (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S163). The hold effect determination process in step S163 is the same as the hold effect determination process in step S160.

  After executing the hold effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of step S163, step S164, and step S165, and ends the winning effect determination process. In addition, each process of step S163, step S164, and step S165 is the same as the process which concerns on each process of step S160, step S161, and step S162.

  When it is determined in step S155 that the time is short (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the time is not short (step S156: NO), a holding addition process according to the start opening prize designation is executed. (Step S166). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating a normal display mode as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, as in the case where it is determined not to execute the hold effect in the determination process of the hold effect and the like. A hold display displayed in the normal display mode is added to the start winning storage display area 5H. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio related to a change effect such as a hold. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination ratio related to the concealment effect and the character effect. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the process of step S160 of the above-described winning effect determination process will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a large character effect and a small character effect are prepared as an action effect or an action gaze effect. In the case where the large character effect and the small character effect are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “character effect”.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, the following process in the process of step S160. (A) A process for determining whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold. (B) Processing for determining the final display color. (C) Processing for determining whether or not to execute the concealment effect. (D) A process for determining whether or not to execute a character effect. (E) Processing for determining the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the character effect.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the current winning, there is a holding display or an active display that is determined to execute at least one of the holding effect change, the concealment effect, and the character effect at the time of the previous winning. And the change category is one of “PA3”, “PA4”, “PA5”, “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5”, and the hold display by the current winning Determines whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold using a random number value when the hold display is 3 or 4 before the digestion.

  On the other hand, when there is a hold display or active display that is determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect at the time of the winning of the previous winning this time at the time of the current winning If the change category is “PA1”, “PA2”, “PB1”, or if the hold display by the current winning is a hold display such as one before digestion, two before digestion or five before digestion, It is decided not to execute a change effect such as holding. It should be noted that when there is a hold display or active display determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect, the change look effect such as the hold is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by performing the performance in a complicated manner. In addition, the control process can be simplified. In the present embodiment, when the change effect such as the hold is not executed, the display color of the hold display or the active display is “white”.

  The effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch notice buffer 194B and determines whether there is a hold display or an active display determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect. Confirm. When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute a change effect such as a hold in a certain prize, information related to the change effect such as a hold is associated with the buffer number corresponding to the hold display of the win in the prefetch notice buffer 194B. When it is decided to execute the concealment effect, the information indicating that the concealment effect is executed is stored in association with the buffer number, and when it is decided to execute the character effect, the character is associated with the buffer number. It is assumed that information related to performance is stored. Therefore, there is a hold display or an active display that the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect by referring to the prefetch notice buffer 194B. It can be confirmed whether or not.

  When there is no hold display or active display determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect, the effect control CPU 120 has the variation category “PA3” “PA4”. ”,“ PA5 ”,“ PB3 ”,“ PB4 ”, and“ PB5 ”.

  When the variation category is any one of “PA3”, “PA4”, “PA5”, “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pending display for the current winning prize three times before or four times. Check if it is the previous hold display.

  When the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display three times before the completion, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold in the case where the hold display by the current winning is the hold display three times before the completion. According to the example shown in FIG. 24A, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a change effect such as hold at a rate of 40%.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a change effect execution determination table for determining whether or not to hold a change effect, which is referred to when the hold display due to the current winning is the display of the previous three reservations. Is determined to determine whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold for each of “No execution” and “Execution” so that “No execution” and “Execution” are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value to be compared with the random number value for use. Specifically, in the determination table for determining whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold is 60:40 for “no execution” and “with execution”. All that needs to be assigned is a percentage.

  In addition, when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display before the last four times, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. To do. FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display four times before the completion. According to the example shown in FIG. 24B, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect such as holding at a rate of 70%.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a change effect execution determination table for determining whether or not to hold a change effect, which is referred to when the hold display due to the current winning is the display of the previous four reservations. Is determined to determine whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold for each of “No execution” and “Execution” so that “No execution” and “Execution” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value to be compared with the random number value for use. Specifically, in the determination table for determining whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold is 30:70 for “no execution” and “with execution”. All that needs to be assigned is a percentage.

  Note that the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the change effect such as hold may be updated in the effect random number update process, for example. The same applies to other random values used by the effect control CPU 120.

  In the present embodiment, the display color of the hold display when newly added to the start winning storage display area 5H is “white”. In addition, when the final display color is “blue”, the initial display color is changed from “white” to the final display color “blue” by a change effect such as one hold, and the final display color is “red”. In this case, the initial display color is changed from “white” to the final display color “red” by a change effect such as one hold.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect such as the hold, the effect display CPU 120 determines the final display color based on the change effect such as the hold at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. FIG. 24C is an explanatory diagram illustrating the final display color determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 24C, when the variation category is any one of “PA3” and “PB3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display color to be “blue” at a rate of 100%. To do. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 24C, when the variation category is either “PA4” or “PA5”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display color to “blue” at a rate of 80%. The final display color is determined to be “red” at a rate of 20%. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 24C, when the variation category is “PB4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display color to be “blue” at a rate of 50%, and the rate of 50%. The final display color is determined to “red”. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 24C, when the variation category is “PB5”, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final display color to be “blue” at a rate of 30% and a rate of 70%. The final display color is determined to “red”.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a final display color determination table that is referred to when the variation category is any one of “PA3” and “PB3”. The final display color determination table includes “blue” and “blue”. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining the final display color for each of “blue” and “red” so that each of “red” is determined at a ratio shown in the corresponding variation category column of FIG. Need only be assigned. Specifically, in the final display color determination table, numerical values to be compared with the random values for determining the final display color may be assigned to “blue” and “red” at a ratio of 100: 0. . The ROM 121 stores a final display color determination table that is referred to when the variation category is any one of “PA4” and “PA5”. The final display color determination table includes “blue”, “ A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining the final display color for each of “blue” and “red” so that each of “red” is determined at a ratio shown in the corresponding variation category column of FIG. Need only be assigned. Specifically, in the final display color determination table, numerical values to be compared with the random values for determining the final display color may be assigned to “blue” and “red” at a ratio of 80:20. . The ROM 121 stores a final display color determination table that is referred to when the variation category is “PB4”. In the final display color determination table, “blue” and “red” are respectively shown in FIG. As determined at the ratio shown in the corresponding variation category column of C), the numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the final display color is assigned to “blue” and “red” at a ratio of 50:50. It only has to be done. The ROM 121 stores a final display color determination table that is referred to when the variation category is “PB5”. In the final display color determination table, “blue” and “red” are respectively shown in FIG. As determined at the ratio shown in the corresponding variation category column of C), the numbers to be compared with the random values for determining the final display color are assigned to “blue” and “red” at a ratio of 30:70. It only has to be done. As shown in FIG. 24C, the big hit expectation is “red”> “blue”.

  In addition, when the final display color is determined, the effect control CPU 120 stores information that can identify the determined final display color in association with the buffer number corresponding to the reserved display in the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the current winning, there is a holding display or an active display that is determined to execute at least one of the holding effect change, the concealment effect, and the character effect at the time of the previous winning. If not, it is determined whether or not to execute the concealment effect using a random value regardless of the determination result of whether or not the change effect such as holding is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a hold display or active display that is determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect at the time of the winning of the previous winning this time at the time of the current winning Is determined not to execute the concealment effect.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the concealment effect is executed at the time of winning a prize, the execution of the concealment effect is started immediately after the determination, and ends after the timing of the execution timing “the change”. In other words, it is assumed that the execution period of the concealment effect is after the winning time to the execution timing “after the change”.

  The effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch notice buffer 194B and determines at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect, as in the case of determining whether or not to execute the change effect such as the hold. It is confirmed whether there is a hold display or an active display determined to be performed. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may store the confirmation result confirmed when deciding whether or not to execute the change effect such as hold, and refer to the confirmation result instead of the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  If there is no hold display or active display determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the concealment effect. Is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the concealment effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 25A, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the concealment effect at a rate of 50% when it becomes “big hit”, and at a rate of 3% when it becomes “lost”. It is decided to execute the concealment effect.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a concealment effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the display result is “big hit”, and the concealment effect execution determination table includes “no execution” and “execution”. Is determined at the ratio shown in the corresponding display result column of FIG. 25A, each of “no execution” and “execution” has a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to perform the concealment effect. It only has to be assigned. Specifically, a numerical value to be compared with the random number for determining whether to perform the concealment effect is assigned to the “non-execution” and “execution” in the ratio of 50:50 in the concealment effect execution presence determination table. It only has to be. The ROM 121 stores a concealment effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the display result is “losing”. The concealment effect execution presence / absence determination table includes “no execution” and “execution”. Is determined at the ratio shown in the corresponding display result column of FIG. 25A, each of “no execution” and “execution” has a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to perform the concealment effect. It only has to be assigned. Specifically, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to perform the concealment effect is assigned to the “non-execution” and “execution” at a ratio of 97: 3 in the concealment effect execution / non-execution determination table. It only has to be.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 25A, the big hit expectation is higher when the concealment effect is executed than when it is not executed.

  Further, when it is determined that the concealment effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating that the concealment effect is executed in association with the buffer number corresponding to the hold display in the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the current winning, there is a holding display or an active display that is determined to execute at least one of the holding effect change, the concealment effect, and the character effect at the time of the previous winning. If there is not, and the hold display by the current winning is the hold display before 3 digests or 4 before digest, regardless of the determination result of whether or not to execute the change effect such as hold Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the character effect using the random value.

  On the other hand, when there is a hold display or active display that is determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect at the time of the winning of the previous winning this time at the time of the current winning Or, when the hold display by the current winning is a hold display such as one before digestion, two before digestion or five before digestion, it is determined that the character effect is not executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch notice buffer 194B and determines at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect, as in the case of determining whether to execute the change effect such as the hold. It is confirmed whether there is a hold display or an active display determined to be executed. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may store the confirmation result confirmed when deciding whether or not to execute the change effect such as hold, and refer to the confirmation result instead of the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  When there is no hold display or active display determined to execute at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, and the character effect, the effect control CPU 120 uses the hold display due to the current winning prize. Check whether the display is 3 or 4 before the digestion.

  FIG. 25B shows whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the character effect in the case where the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display before the third digest or the hold display before the fourth digest. Determine at such a decision rate. FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not the character effect is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 25 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the concealment effect, it determines that the character effect is not executed at the rate of 70%, and executes the large character effect at the rate of 15%. And decide to execute the small character effect at a rate of 15%. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 25 (B), when executing the concealment effect, the CPU 120 for effect control determines not to execute the character effect at a rate of 20%, and performs the large character effect at a rate of 75%. It is determined to execute, and it is determined to execute the small character effect at a rate of 5%.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a character effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the concealment effect is determined as “no execution”. The character effect execution execution determination table includes “no execution” and “large character effect”. “No execution”, “Execution of large character effect” and “Small character effect” as determined in the ratio shown in the corresponding concealment effect column in FIG. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute a character effect needs to be assigned to each “executed”. Specifically, in the character effect execution determination table, numerical values to be compared with the random value for character effect execution determination are “no execution”, “large character effect execution” and “small character effect execution”. As long as it is allocated at a ratio of 70:15:15. Further, the ROM 121 stores a character effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the concealment effect is determined to be “execution performed”. The character effect execution determination table includes “no execution” and “large character effect”. “No execution”, “Execution of large character effect” and “Small character effect” as determined in the ratio shown in the corresponding concealment effect column in FIG. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute a character effect needs to be assigned to each “executed”. Specifically, in the character effect execution determination table, numerical values to be compared with the random value for character effect execution determination are “no execution”, “large character effect execution” and “small character effect execution”. As long as it is assigned at a ratio of 20: 75: 5.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 25B, the large character effect is more easily executed when the concealment effect is executed than when it is not executed. Also, according to the example shown in FIG. 25B, the small character effect is less likely to be executed when the concealment effect is executed than when it is not executed. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 25B, the character effect is more easily executed when the concealment effect is not executed than when it is not executed.

  Further, when it is determined that the character effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the information related to the character effect in association with the buffer number corresponding to the hold display in the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the effect determined to be executed when it is determined that at least one of the change effect such as the hold effect and the character effect is to be executed at the time of the current winning. Or it determines with the determination ratio as shown in FIG.25 (D).

  FIG. 25C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold effect and the character effect when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display before the last 3 games. According to the example shown in FIG. 25 (C), the production control CPU 120 determines the execution timing as “2 prior to digestion” at a rate of 50%, and sets the execution timing as “1 prior to digestion” at a rate of 30%. And the execution timing is determined as “the variation” at a rate of 20%. Note that the execution timing “the variation” is a timing during variable display. Therefore, when it is determined that the change effect such as the hold is executed and the execution timing “the change” is determined, the active display change effect is executed.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores an execution timing determination table that is referred to when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display three times before the digest, and the execution timing determination table stores “two before digest”. As shown in FIG. 25 (C), each “digestion 1” and “variation” is executed for each of “digestion 2”, “digestion 1”, and “variation”. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value to be compared with the random number for timing determination. Specifically, in the execution timing determination table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number for determining the execution timing are 50:30 for “2 before digestion”, “1 before digestion”, and “the change”. : It suffices if it is assigned at a ratio of 20.

  FIG. 25D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold effect and the character effect when the hold display by the current winning is the hold display before the last 4 pieces. According to the example shown in FIG. 25D, the production control CPU 120 determines the execution timing as “3 digests before” at a rate of 20%, and the execution timing as “2 digests before” at a rate of 40%. The execution timing is determined to be “one digestion before” at a rate of 20%, and the execution timing is determined to be “the change” at a rate of 20%.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores an execution timing determination table that is referred to when the display of the hold due to the current winning is the hold display of the previous 4th digest, and the execution timing determination table includes “3 prior digests”. As shown in FIG. 25 (D), “3 before digestion”, “2 digestion before”, “digestion 1”, so that “digestion 2”, “digestion 1”, and “variation” are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. A numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the execution timing may be assigned to each of the “before” and “variation”. Specifically, in the execution timing determination table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number for determining the execution timing are “3 before digestion”, “2 before digestion”, “1 before digestion”, and “the relevant variation”. As long as it is assigned at a ratio of 20: 40: 20: 20.

  In addition, when the execution timing is determined, the effect control CPU 120 stores information that can specify the execution timing in association with the buffer number corresponding to the hold display in the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  According to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, for example, when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display three times before the completion, it is determined that the change effect such as the hold is executed, but the character effect is not executed. When this is done, the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. In addition, when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display before the last four times, when it is decided to execute the change effect such as hold but not to execute the character effect, The execution timing is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display three times before the completion, when it is determined that the character effect is to be executed but the change effect such as the hold is not to be executed, the character effect execution timing Is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In addition, when it is determined that the character effect is to be executed but the change effect such as the hold is not to be executed when the hold display by the current winning is the hold display four times before the completion, the execution timing of the character effect is determined. Is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when it is determined that both the on-holding change effect and the character effect are to be executed when the on-hold display due to the current winning is the on-hold display for the previous three games, the on-hold change effect and the character effect are executed in common. Is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. In addition, when it is determined that both the on-hold change display and the character effect are to be executed when the on-hold display by the current winning is the on-hold display for the previous four times, the common change execution effect and the character effect are executed. Is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. That is, when it is determined to execute both the change effect such as the hold effect and the character effect, the execution timing is the same.

  As described above, the character effect is an effect executed as an action effect or an action gaze effect. When it is decided to execute the change effect such as the hold effect but not to execute the character effect, the change effect such as the hold effect is executed without executing the action effect or the action effect effect at one timing determined as described above. Will be executed. When it is determined that the character effect is to be executed but the change effect such as the hold is not to be executed, the character effect is executed as the action gaze effect at one timing determined as described above. . In addition, when it is determined to execute both the change effect such as the hold effect and the character effect, the character effect is executed as the action effect at one timing determined as described above.

  The processing in step S160 has been described above, but the effect determined in step S160 is executed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect processing in step S172, for example.

  26 to 30 are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. Specifically, FIG. 26 shows an example of a display operation when a large character effect is executed. FIG. 27 shows an example of the display operation when the small character effect is executed. FIG. 28 shows an example of the display operation when the concealment effect is executed. FIG. 29 shows an example of a display operation when a small character effect and a concealment effect are executed. FIG. 30 shows an example of a character effect display operation. In each figure, white is represented by “◯”, blue is represented by “◎”, and “red” is represented by “★” as a display mode of the hold display or the active display.

  First, the large character effect will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 26A, variable display corresponding to the active display K0 is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and three hold displays H1, H2, and H3 are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. In this state, the fourth hold display H4 is additionally displayed due to a new winning. “4” “0” on the right side of the display area is a hold number display for displaying the hold number. The upper “4” indicates the number of holds in the first hold display, and the lower “0” indicates the number of holds in the second hold display.

  When there is a winning that becomes the hold display H4, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the process of step S160, a process for determining whether to execute a change effect such as a hold, a process for determining a final display color, Processing for determining whether or not to execute the concealment effect, processing for determining whether or not to execute the character effect, and processing for determining the execution timing are executed.

  In the example of FIG. 26, when there is a winning that becomes the hold display H4, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect such as hold, and determines that the final display color is “red”, and executes the concealment effect. Suppose that it is determined not to be performed, it is determined that the large character effect is to be executed, and the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the large character effect is determined to be “two times before digestion”. In addition, the hold display H4 (T) in the example indicates that it is a target for a change effect such as a hold and a large character effect. The display colors of the four hold displays H1, H2, H3, and H4 (T) in the start winning storage display area 5H are all “white”.

  FIG. 26B shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 26A and a variable display corresponding to the active display K1 is performed. Three on-hold displays H2, H3, and H4 (T) are displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. FIG. 26 (c) shows a scene following FIG. 26 (b) in which a fourth hold display H5 is additionally displayed due to a new winning.

  In the scenes (b) and (c) of FIG. 26, the hold display H4 (T) is at a position three times before the digestion instead of two times before the digestion determined as the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the large character effect. . Therefore, in the scenes (b) and (c) of FIG. 26, neither the on-hold change effect nor the large character effect is executed. Further, in the scene of FIG. 26 (c), there is a hold display H4 (T) in the start winning storage display area 5H. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that neither the change effect such as the hold effect, the concealment effect, or the character effect is executed in the winning that becomes the hold display H5.

  FIG. 26D shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 26C and variable display corresponding to the active display K2 is performed. FIG. 26 (e) is a scene following FIG. 26 (d).

  In the scenes of (d) and (e) in FIG. 26, the hold display H4 (T) is at the position two times before the digestion determined as the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the large character effect. Therefore, in the scenes of (d) and (e) in FIG. 26, the hold change effect and the large character effect are executed. Specifically, since the large character effect is executed together with the hold change effect, the large character effect is executed as the action effect. In the example shown in (d) and (e) of FIG. 26, after displaying the character to pray, the effect control CPU 120 changes the hold display H4 (T) from “white” to “red” through the character's prayer. A large character effect is executed as an effect effect to show.

  In addition, although the operation | movement and facial expression of the character of (d) of FIG. 26 are illustrations when a hold display changes, when a hold display does not change, it will be another operation | movement and a facial expression. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 differs in the character's effect mode when the large character effect is executed as the action effect and when the large character effect is executed as the action gaze effect. The same may be said about the character in the small character production mentioned later.

  Next, the small character effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A shows an example in which a small character effect is executed as an action effect. FIG. 27A shows a scene that continues from the middle of FIG. Specifically, (a) in FIG. 26 → (b) in FIG. 26 → (c) in FIG. 26 → (a) in FIG. 27 (A) → (b) in FIG. 27 (A) → FIG. 27 (A) ) In (c).

  However, (a) in FIG. 26 → (b) in FIG. 26 → (c) in FIG. 26 → (a) in FIG. 27 (A) → (b) in FIG. 27 (A) → ( c) In the example of the transition, when there is a winning that becomes the hold display H4, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect such as hold, and determines that the final display color is “blue”. It is assumed that it is determined not to execute the concealment effect, it is determined that the small character effect is executed, and the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the small character effect is determined to be “two before digestion”. In addition, the hold display H4 (T) in this example indicates that the hold display H4 is a target for a change effect such as a hold and a small character effect.

  FIG. 27A shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 26C and a variable display corresponding to the active display K2 is performed. (B) of FIG. 27 (A) is a scene following (a) of FIG. 27 (A). (C) of FIG. 27 (A) is a scene following (b) of FIG. 27 (A).

  In the scenes (a) to (c) of FIG. 27A, the hold display H4 (T) is at the position two before the digestion determined as the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the small character effect. Therefore, in the scenes (a) to (c) of FIG. 27A, the hold change effect and the small character effect are executed. Specifically, since the small character effect is executed together with the hold change effect, the small character effect is executed as the action effect. In the example shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 27A, the effect control CPU 120 has a character having an object corresponding to the final display color “blue”, and a mark indicating the hold display H4 (T). After the character is displayed, a small character effect is provided as an effect effect that moves the character and places the object held at the position of the mark so that the hold display H4 (T) changes from “white” to “blue”. Running. In addition, the mark which instruct | indicates hold display H4 (T) may be a part of small character effect, and may differ from the small character effect performed accompanying a small character effect.

  FIG. 27 (B) shows an example in which a small character effect is executed as an action gaze effect. FIG. 27B shows a scene that continues from the middle of FIG. Specifically, (a) in FIG. 26 → (b) in FIG. 26 → (c) in FIG. 26 → (a) in FIG. 27 (B) → (b) in FIG. 27 (B) → FIG. 27 (B) ) In (c).

  However, (a) in FIG. 26 → (b) in FIG. 26 → (c) in FIG. 26 → (a) in FIG. 27 (B) → (b) in FIG. 27 (B) → ( c) In the example of the transition, when there is a winning that becomes the hold display H4, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the change effect such as the hold, determines not to execute the concealment effect, It is determined that the production is to be executed, and the execution timing of the small character production is determined to be “2 digests”. In addition, the hold display H4 (T) in this example indicates that the hold display H4 is a target for small character effects.

  (A) of FIG. 27 (B) represents a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of (c) of FIG. 26 and variable display corresponding to the active display K2 is performed. (B) in FIG. 27 (B) is a scene following (a) in FIG. 27 (B). (C) of FIG. 27 (B) is a scene following (b) of FIG. 27 (B).

  In the scenes (a) to (c) of FIG. 27B, the hold display H4 (T) is at the position two times before the digestion determined as the execution timing of the small character effect. Therefore, in the scenes (a) to (c) of FIG. Specifically, since the small character effect is executed independently, the small character effect is executed as the action gaze effect. In the example shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 27B, the effect control CPU 120 actually has a character having an object corresponding to the display color that does not change the display mode, and the hold display H4 (T). After displaying a mark indicating that the character is moved, and the character is moved and passed without placing the object held at the position of the mark, the hold display H4 (T) remains “white” and the action display effect is small. The character production is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described “gass display color” is determined using a random number. For example, the ROM 121 stores a gusset display color determination table that is referred to when a small character effect is executed as an action gusset effect, and each of “blue” and “red” is predetermined in the gusset display color determination table. As determined by the ratio, each of “blue” and “red” only needs to be assigned a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the display color. In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined ratio may always be constant, may differ according to a display result, may differ according to a fluctuation pattern, and may differ according to a date. It may be a thing, and may differ according to these combinations. Instead of determining the “gass display color” using random numbers, the “gass display color” may always be the same color.

  Subsequently, the concealment effect will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 28A, variable display corresponding to the active display K0 is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and three hold displays H1, H2, and H3 are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. In this state, a fourth hold display H4 is additionally displayed by a new winning, and a scene in which a concealment effect is started by the new winning is shown.

  In the example of FIG. 28, when there is a winning that becomes the hold display H4, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the change effect such as hold, and decides that the final display color is “red”, and executes the concealment effect. Then, it is determined that the character effect is not executed, and the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold is determined to be “3 digests”. As described above, the execution period of the concealment effect is from the time of winning a prize to the execution timing “after the change”. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the concealment effect over a plurality of variations. In addition, the hold display H4 (T) in this example indicates that the hold display H4 is a target for a change effect such as a hold effect and a concealment effect.

  Since it is determined to execute the concealment effect at the time of winning a prize, as shown in FIG. 28A, the concealment effect is started immediately after the determination. In FIG. 28 (a) to FIG. 28 (e), the shaded display in the lower part of the display area corresponds to the concealment effect. In FIGS. 28A to 28E, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the hold display and the active display can be visually recognized even if the shaded display is made. Execution makes at least some of them difficult or impossible to see. In the example of FIG. 28, it is assumed that the hold display and the active display cannot be visually recognized during the execution period of the concealment effect.

  FIG. 28B shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 28A and a variable display corresponding to the active display K1 is performed. FIG. 28C shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 28B and a variable display corresponding to the active display K2 is performed. (D) of FIG. 28 represents a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of (c) of FIG. 28 and variable display corresponding to the active display K3 is performed. FIG. 28E shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 28D and variable display corresponding to the active display K4 (T) is performed. (F) of FIG. 28 represents a scene following the process (e) of FIG. 28, where the concealment effect has ended.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 28, the hold display H4 (T) is at the position three times before the digestion determined as the execution timing of the change effect such as hold. Therefore, the hold change effect is executed in the scene of FIG. 28 (b). However, since (a) to (e) of FIG. 28 are the concealment period, and the hold display and the active display are not visible during the concealment period, the player in the scene of FIG. Cannot recognize the display color of the hold display H4 (T) or the like. The player can recognize the display color of the hold display H4 (T) or the like after the concealment effect ends as shown in FIG. Thereby, interest can be suitably maintained until the end of the concealment effect.

  In the example of FIG. 28, the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold is determined as “3 before digestion”, but when the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold is determined as “the change”, FIG. In the scene of (e), the active change effect is executed. That is, the display mode of the active display H4 (T) corresponding to the hold display H4 (T) changes from “white” to “red” during the concealment period. In other words, the concealment effect ends after the execution timing “the change”. That is, the concealment period is from the time of winning a prize to the execution timing “after the change”.

  Next, the case where the small character effect and the concealment effect are executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 shows a scene that continues from the middle of FIG. Specifically, FIG. 26 (a) → FIG. 26 (b) → FIG. 26 (c) → FIG. 29 (a) → FIG. 29 (b) → FIG. 29 (c) → FIG. Transition is made as (d) → (e) in FIG. 29 → (f) in FIG. 29.

  However, (a) in FIG. 26 → (b) in FIG. 26 → (c) in FIG. 26 → (a) in FIG. 29 → (b) in FIG. 29 → (c) in FIG. 29 → (d) in FIG. → (e) in FIG. 29 → (f) in FIG. 29 In the example of transition as shown in FIG. 29 (f), when there is a winning that becomes a hold display H4, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a change effect such as hold, The final display color is determined to be “red”, the concealment effect is determined to be executed, the small character effect is determined to be executed, and the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the small character effect is determined to be “2 digests” Shall. Therefore, in this example, the concealment effect is executed in (a) of FIG. 26 → (b) of FIG. 26 → (c) of FIG. 26. In addition, the hold display H4 (T) in this example indicates that the hold display H4 is a target for a change effect such as a hold effect, a concealment effect, and a small character effect.

  FIG. 29A shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 26C and variable display corresponding to the active display K2 is performed. FIG. 29B is a scene following FIG. 29A. FIG. 29 (c) is a scene following FIG. 29 (b). FIG. 29D shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 29C and variable display corresponding to the active display K3 is performed. FIG. 29E shows a scene where a shift is performed once from the scene of FIG. 29D and variable display corresponding to the active display K4 (T) is performed. FIG. 29 (f) shows a scene following FIG. 29 (e) where the concealment effect has ended.

  In the scenes of (a) to (c) in FIG. 29, the hold display H4 (T) is at the position two times before the digestion determined as the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold and the small character effect. Accordingly, in the scenes (a) to (c) of FIG. 29, the hold change effect and the small character effect are executed. Specifically, since the small character effect is executed together with the hold change effect, the small character effect is executed as the action effect. In the scenes of (a) to (c) of FIG. 29, the player can recognize what the display color of the specific hold display on which the small character effect is applied, even though it is during the concealment period. . Specifically, in the scene of FIG. 29 (c), the character (small) passes by without placing an object corresponding to the final display color “red” at the position of the mark. From the scene of (c), it becomes possible to recognize that the display color of the hold display at the position of the mark is “red”.

  In other words, if the small character effect is executed during the concealment period, there is a possibility that the change target or the display mode after the change may be recognized, and the interest cannot be suitably maintained. In order to make the problem difficult to occur, the small character effect is less likely to be executed when the concealment effect is executed than when the concealment effect is not executed.

  In addition, when the small character effect is executed during the concealment period, there is a possibility that the change target and the display mode after the change are recognized. That is, as shown in FIG. 27A, the small character effect is executed in a state in which the change target and the display mode after the change are clearly shown in a state before the hold display and the active display are changed. Therefore, if the small character effect is executed as the action effect, even if the state after changing the hold display or the active display cannot be confirmed, that is, even during the concealment period, the change target and the display mode after the change Can be recognized. On the other hand, when the large character effect is executed during the concealment period, there is no possibility that the change target or the display mode after the change is recognized. That is, as shown in FIG. 26, the large character effect is executed in a state in which neither the change target nor the display mode after the change is clearly shown in a state before the hold display or the active display is changed. Therefore, even if a large character effect is executed as an effect effect, if the state after the hold display or active display is changed cannot be confirmed, that is, during the concealment period, the change target and the display mode after the change are recognized. Impossible.

  Therefore, as described above, when the concealment effect is executed, the small character effect is less likely to be executed than when the concealment effect is not executed, whereas when the concealment effect is executed, the concealment effect is not executed. The large character production is not difficult to be executed. Rather, in order to increase the expectation after the concealment period, the large character effect is more easily executed when the concealment effect is executed than when the concealment effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 25B, when the concealment effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the large character effect and the small character effect is the same, but when the concealment effect is not executed, the large character effect is the smaller character effect. It may be easier to determine, or the small character production may be more easily determined than the large character production.

  In addition, although it demonstrated that the case where a large character effect was performed as an effect production and the case where a large character effect was performed as an effect effect effect was performed, the character effect mode was different, the case where a large character effect was performed as an effect effect And the case where the large character effect is executed as the action gasase effect may be the same character effect mode. For example, the action and facial expression of the character may be the same when the hold display or the like changes and when the hold display or the like does not change. Thereby, when a large character effect is executed during the concealment period, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the hold display or the like has changed in addition to the change target and the display mode after the change.

  Next, the character effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  It has been described that the large character effect is an effect executed in a state in which neither the change target nor the display mode after the change is clearly indicated in the state before the hold display or the active display is changed. It is not limited to. For example, the large character effect may be an effect executed in a state before changing the hold display or the active display, in which the change target is not clearly shown but the display form after the change is clearly shown. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the large character effect as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B instead of the large character effect as shown in FIGS. Also good. In the large character production shown in FIG. 30A, the character looks at the object corresponding to the final display color “red” and prays. Therefore, even during the concealment period, when the large character effect is executed as the action effect, the change target cannot be recognized, but the display mode after the change can be recognized.

  It was explained that the small character effect is an effect that is executed in a state in which the change target and the display form after the change are clearly shown in the state before the hold display and the active display are changed. It is not limited to. For example, the small character effect may be an effect executed in a state in which the change target is clearly shown but the display form after the change is not clearly shown in a state before the hold display or the active display is changed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 replaces the small character effects as shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C with small characters as shown in FIGS. An effect may be executed. In the small character effect shown in FIG. 30B, the character does not have an object corresponding to the final display color. Therefore, when the small character effect is executed as the action effect during the concealment period, the change target can be recognized, but the changed display mode cannot be recognized.

  In addition, when it is executed during the concealment period, the production A is an effect that the change target and the display mode after the change are unrecognizable, and when it is executed during the concealment period, the change target cannot be recognized, but after In the display mode, the recognizable effect is effect B, and when it is executed during the concealment period, the change target is recognizable, but the changed display mode is the unrecognizable effect C. When the effect that can recognize both the change target and the display mode after the change is the effect D when it is executed, the presence or absence of the execution may be determined as follows. When the concealment effect is executed, the effect A may be determined more easily than at least one of the effect B and the effect C. Further, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect D may be determined more difficult than at least one of the effect B and the effect C. Further, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect B may be less likely to be executed than when the concealment effect is not being executed. Further, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect C may be less likely to be executed than when the concealment effect is not being executed.

  By the way, in such a pachinko gaming machine 1, it is known that music can be selected in accordance with the player's action, and the selected music can be output in a different mode between the advantageous state and other than the advantageous state. However, the effect of selecting the music is poor.

  In the following, as a second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can improve the production effect at the time of music selection will be described.

  In the second embodiment, for the purpose of preventing the description from becoming complicated, a configuration for improving the production effect at the time of music selection will be described, but this is an example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the second suggestion effect in a mode in which the display mode after the change of the specific display is easier to recognize than the first suggestion effect described in the first embodiment. Even if it has a structure for preventing the display aspect of the specific display after the change explained in the form from being understood and the gaming interest will be lowered, and a structure for improving the production effect at the time of music selection Good.

  Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and a plurality of types that can be distinguished from each other in a special game as an example of a variable display game. The special symbol which is the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each have a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to a number or symbol. Various types of special symbols composed of etc. are variably displayed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  A plurality of types of special symbols that are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B only need to have a symbol number for identifying each of them. As an example, “0” is added as a symbol number to a special symbol indicating a symbol “−”, and “1” to “9” may be added as symbol numbers for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. In a decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions, for example, three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, Variations of the decorative symbols are started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol can be changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5. The confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. It should be noted that, for example, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols, the display of identification information such as decorative symbols is stopped and variable display is terminated. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HR displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HL displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is due to the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Occurs based on the starting prize. That is, the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled to the big hit game state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

  For example, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes through the first start prize opening, the first If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one, and the first special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established by the occurrence of the second start prize that the game ball passes through the second start prize opening, 2 If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second special condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by 1, and the second special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. 1 is subtracted from the number stored in the second special figure hold. If the first special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the special figure game based on the start winning is invalid. The prize ball may be paid out only. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit when the second starting prize is generated, the second starting condition is not satisfied, and the special figure game based on the starting prize is invalid. The prize ball may be paid out only.

  In the first hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. The term “special figure pending storage number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and the total pending memory number, and particularly refers to a part thereof. It may happen.

  The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the first hold display, for example, left-justified. The first hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the first special figure hold memory number, and hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the left end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR, the hold on the first hold display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR, a new first hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. Add to the site. When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HR, when a special game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HR The first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted, and the first hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is deleted. Move in the direction of the part.

  The second hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure reserved memory number. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL, the second hold display part 5HL holds it. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, a new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. Add to the site. When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HL, when a special game using the second special drawing is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, in the second hold display portion 5HL The second hold display in the rightmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased, and the second hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is deleted. Move in the direction of the part.

  The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display unit AHA is referred to as active display. In the active display part AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold display erased in the first hold display part 5HR is displayed. The corresponding active display is performed. Further, in the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special game using the second special figure due to the establishment of the second start condition, the second hold stored in the second storage unit 5HL is erased. Active display corresponding to the display is performed. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display only need to have colors and patterns in common. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 31, an active display portion AHA is disposed between the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. It only has to be. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL may be replaced with each other.

  A display device for displaying the number of special figure hold memories may be provided together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, or instead of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. . In the example shown in FIG. 31, together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number, respectively. .

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. And forming a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. Put it in a state. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the enlarged open state where the game ball can pass through the second start winning port, the closed state where the game ball cannot pass, or the passage difficult. It can be changed to a second variable state such as a normal open state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, and the first reserved memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the first start condition is To establish. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the second start condition is To establish.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 that is used for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 32, and a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special winning opening and the game ball cannot pass through the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, and the game ball easily passes through the big prize opening. Become. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass and advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when the gaming ball passes through another winning opening such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by passing the game ball through the special prize winning opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed so that it can be changed. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered one of the general winning holes is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle is provided that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. A dish is provided. A lower tray is provided at the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3 so as to hold the surplus balls overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged out of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body. A controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilt operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31 </ b> A.

  The member that forms the upper plate is provided with a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 32 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 11 controls turning on / off of each LED constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control variable display of the first special diagram and the second special diagram. And a function for controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol indicator 20 by performing on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol indicator 20. ing.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a section.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, decoration LEDs, etc. A lamp driver circuit for performing on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch, and a count switch 23. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball as a game medium like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. It is sufficient that the first bit of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data is set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 102 that provides a game control work area. The CPU 103 is configured to execute a game control program to perform a control operation, the random number circuit 104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and the I / O 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and the like, the numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation are countably updated. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects such as a random number for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols, and a random value for determining a notice effect. Controlled.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 32 stores various data tables used to control the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern includes, for example, process data including effect control execution data and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value.

  Various data used for controlling the rendering operation is stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the rendering control board 12 shown in FIG. Specifically, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. In this effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. The flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, VDP, CGROM, VRAM, LCD drive circuit, and the like may be mounted on the display control unit 123. The VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command transmitted to the sound control board 13, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14, and the like are output. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor provided in a predetermined hit ball launching device based on a predetermined operation performed by a player on a hit ball operating handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Thus, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first start is performed because the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The condition is met. After that, for example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the second start condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. To do. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 32, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. Whether or not to make the symbol variable display result a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative display different from the special symbols is variably displayed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big jackpot”, and the bonus game state is controlled as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. In other words, whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a special symbol variable display result, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed, and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost”.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, a predetermined big hit is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. A finalized decorative symbol to be combined is derived and displayed. As an example, if the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of big hits is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in the period until the predetermined opening upper limit time elapses, or the period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. Round game is executed. During a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the big winning opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit time in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state advantageous to the player is relatively long as a round game in the jackpot game state. A regular round of time is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is relatively short is executed as a round game in the jackpot game state. Is done. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round is longer than the first period in the normal open round. Becomes a short second period. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when the short-term open round is executed, the number of executions of the round game may be a second round number that is smaller than the first round number that is the number of executions of the normal open round. That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is a period in which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes through the big winning opening in each round game, compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed. May be at least one of the second period being shorter than the first period and the second round number being less than the first round number.

  When such a short-term open round is executed, a predetermined number of balls can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period, etc., it becomes a big hit gaming state in which the actual payout cannot be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state based on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. Become. Thus, when the jackpot gaming state in which the normal open round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state and the second state. On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which a short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “accurate”, a special change is made in the second change mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state and the second state is performed.

  Note that the first state and the second state of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 described above are different from the “first state” and the “second state” that will be described in the description of the volume state display process described later. The “first state” to be described later is, for example, a gaming state other than during the super reach effect or a state of waiting for a customer and the like and not displaying an error. The “second state” to be described later is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine Then, it is the gaming state etc. during the super reach production.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, based on the fact that a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, the probability display may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is continued until a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. To be controlled. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The short-time state continues until a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, that a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, or that a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. To be controlled. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probability changing state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is changed between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening compared to the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal game to have a shorter variation time than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of each normal game is “per normal” in each normal game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” is higher than that in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by the control for increasing the length of time and the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control. By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, a decorative pattern other than the final stop symbol is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time, or a plurality of ornaments An effect that is performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed because the symbols are synchronously fluctuating with the same symbol or the display position is switched is called a reach effect. As a reach effect, decoration such as displaying a character image different from the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, changing the display mode of the background image, and reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design. An effect operation different from changing the pattern variation mode may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the like are different from the operation modes before the reach mode. May be included in the reach production. The reach state and its state are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost” and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And the possibility of being a “big hit” varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production and a super reach production are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is higher than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, the variable display status of decorative designs may be in the reach state, the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that the variable display effect of pseudo-continuous variation can be executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, in response to the start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once, a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It is possible to perform the effect display that is changed once again after the temporary stop until the predetermined time. The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of special combinations are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lose combinations is displayed temporarily. A predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, during the period of each variable display by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, it is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area. It may be controlled so that things increase one by one. In addition, during the period of each variable display, the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs may be controlled to change. .

  As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, control is performed so that the effect model provided inside or outside the game area operates during each variable display period by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. At this time, during each variable display period, the operation mode of the production model may be controlled to change, or the operation model among the plurality of production models may be controlled to change. .

  Control may be performed so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all of the outputs. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode changes, the variable display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to a game state advantageous to the player, such as the possibility of being given a predetermined game value, such as the possibility of being controlled to the big hit game state. The possibility may be increased.

  For example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the variable display of decorative symbols is as if the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change once to three times. It can appear as if it was started 2-4 times in a row. When the number of repeated executions of pseudo continuous fluctuation increases, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” becomes higher than when the number of pseudo continuous changes is small. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation is repeatedly executed. For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed up to more than 1 to 3, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas and then temporarily displaying the decorative symbols. An effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed by changing the decorative symbol after changing the decorative symbol again in a predetermined number of decorative symbol display areas in the area.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination, the variable variable display state of the decorative symbols is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed for deriving and displaying a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as a development opportunity. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in a decorative combination display area that temporarily becomes a false combination chance decorative symbol display area. Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of 5L, 5C, and 5R, by changing the decorative symbols again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As long as it is executed before the reach mode is reached. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when such a notice effect is executed.

  Among the notice effects, what is a prefetch notice effect is included. The pre-reading notice effect may cause the variable display result to be a “big hit” depending on the presentation mode before the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is executed. It is a notice effect that can be noticed. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display to be noticed is started is referred to as a single notice effect.

  As an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL are different from the display form in the normal time. By changing to, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in the variable display to be noticed may be executed. More specifically, the variable display result may be a “big hit” by setting the display color in the display part for displaying the number of special figure reservations to be specified in a specific color different from the predetermined color in the normal state. It is only necessary to be able to report that is higher than usual. In addition, by making the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display a specific pattern different from the normal time, it is possible to notify that the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than normal. Also good. Alternatively, a display mode that indicates a predetermined message as the first hold display or the second hold display may be used to notify that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual. Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  Further, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image on the active display unit AHA can be changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, so that it is possible to become a “big hit” in the variable display satisfying the start condition. A notice effect of “active display change” for notifying the sex or the like may be executed. More specifically, if the display color in the active display unit AHA is a specific color different from the predetermined color in the normal state, it is possible to notify that the possibility that the variable display result is a “big hit” is higher than normal. Good. The notice effect of “active display change” is also referred to as an active display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the variable display mode is variable. The case where the display mode is “reach” is included. When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is not reached, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the combination of the predetermined decorative pattern that does not become reach is stopped. Is displayed. When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach display is executed after the variable display state of the decorative design becomes the reach state after the variable display state of the decorative design is started. A combination of predetermined decorative patterns that should not be displayed is stopped. The non-reach combination and the decorative symbol constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 1 A process for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is higher than the closed state of the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B with the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal figure game as “per normal figure”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state in which game balls easily pass by frequency.

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control, setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process is a process that controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 20 to enable variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control accompanying the short-time control, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. The control for improving the probability that the variable display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the variable display result being “per normal figure”. Control for making the tilt control time for performing tilt control longer than that in the normal state and part or all of the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit an effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 33 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S121). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S121; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number which is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (step S122). At this time, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S122 (step S122; No), the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to “1”. Setting is made (step S123).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S121 (step S121; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S122 (step S122; Yes), normal It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S124). At this time, if the second start opening switch 22B is ON (step S124; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (step S125). At this time, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S125 (step S125; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S126).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S123 and S126, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S127). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by one. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (step S128).

  After executing the process of step S128, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S129). As an example, in the process of step S129, a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result or a jackpot type determination from among numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the random value MR2 and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S130).

  In the processing of step S130, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set. Data is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The first special figure storage unit stores a special figure game that has not yet started as a special game, although the game ball has passed through the first starting prize opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting prize has been generated. Remember. The second special figure holding storage unit holds a special figure game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second starting prize has been generated. Remember as.

  For example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening, and the CPU 103 extracts the special number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing the game ball. Random value MR1 for determining the display result, random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value. . The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result in this special figure game To determine whether or not to control, whether the variable display result is "big hit", whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, whether the decorative display variable display mode is a specific mode, etc. It becomes the reserved storage information to be made possible.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding numbers in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening, and the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment of the second starting condition by passing the game ball. Random value MR1 for determining the display result, random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value. . The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result in this special figure game To determine whether or not to control, whether the variable display result is "big hit", whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, whether the decorative display variable display mode is a specific mode, etc. It becomes the reserved storage information to be made possible.

  Subsequent to the process of step S130, a setting for transmitting a start opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S131). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S132). Then, the setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S133). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S134). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S134; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S135), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S134; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S136). The process proceeds to step S124. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S132 of FIG. 34 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in a special symbol normal process to be described later, a determination as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol display result as "big hit", The variation pattern is determined. On the other hand, separately from these decisions, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process in step S132 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening, thereby displaying the big win symbol as a special figure display result. It is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is determined to be derived, whether or not the random pattern MR3 is determined to be a variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and the like. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the start winning opening is started, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit”, the decorative symbol is variable It is determined whether or not a reach state is displayed during display, and based on this prediction result, it is determined whether or not a notice effect as a pre-read effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. can do.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 103 first determines the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of the time reduction flag or the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Specify (step S251). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, it is only necessary to identify whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the big hit gaming state by confirming the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit in which the big hit gaming state is set (step S252). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base is being operated in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S253). When it is determined in step S252 that a big hit is made (step S252; Yes), or in step S253, it is determined that the high base is being set (step S253; Yes), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not (step S254).

  When it is determined in step S253 that the vehicle is not in high base (step S253; No), or when it is determined in step S254 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S254; Yes), FIG. The variable display contents are determined using the random number value extracted in the process of step S129 shown in (step S255). In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, data used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state is selected from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the determined value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of step S129. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, and it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. The super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of losing is determined in advance as a range of random values that can be determined as a variation pattern with reach production including super reach or normal reach regardless of the number of special figure hold memory. It only has to be.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance are prepared. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of the plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of loss when the variable display result is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 41 (B1) and FIG. 41 (B2), determination values are assigned to a plurality of variation patterns. It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure holding memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 36 shows an example of determination of the variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without a time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 41 (B1) are assigned to the variation pattern is used. In this case, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  In addition, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic change state with time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 41 (B2) are assigned to the change patterns is used. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number when the start winning occurs does not necessarily match the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. May change due to winnings. For this reason, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figure storage may not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the changing pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is `` lost '', at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is A common decision value is included regardless of the number of special figure holds. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memories at the time of starting winning or variable display start in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined to be a variation pattern involving.

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at lose”. judge. If the variable display result is “losing” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in step S254 shown in FIG. 35 that the start port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (step S254; No), the setting for limiting the winning determination in the process of step S255 is set. This is performed (step S256). Thus, when the high opening control associated with the short time control is performed or when the game state is a big hit game, the determination of the variable display content based on the occurrence of the start winning due to the game ball passing through the first starting winning opening is not performed. To be limited. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of starting winning according to the determination result by the process of step S255 and the setting by the process of step S256 are set (step S257). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S258), and the winning random number determination processing is terminated.

  FIG. 37A shows a setting example of a start opening winning designation command, a pending storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as a reserved memory count notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory count notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory count notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the pending storage count notification command, different EXT data is set according to the special figure pending storage count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When the game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated, the first special figure is suspended in the process of step S122 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the stored number has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of step S123 shown in FIG. 34, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S131. A first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S258 shown in FIG. Further, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S133 shown in FIG. Is done.

  When the game ball that has passed through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning is generated, the second special chart is obtained in the process of step S125 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S126 shown in FIG. 34, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S131. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S258 shown in FIG. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S133 shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the first starting winning opening, or at the time of the second starting winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the second starting winning opening, The comparison result using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is notified to the effect control board 12 side. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command indicate whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the start winning has occurred. Is sent as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  Note that the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, the number of reserved memories decreases while the number of reserved memories added indicates that the number of first special figure reserved memories or the number of second reserved figure reserved memories has increased. Alternatively, a reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 37 (B) exemplifies the notification contents by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 37B, the command C402H, the command C203H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Notify the judgment result. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of losing, and notifies the determination result at the time of winning that the variation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of losing. The command C403H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of losing, and notifies the determination result at the time of winning that the variation pattern with the reach effect is determined at the time of losing. The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notify the judgment result. In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 33 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special diagram reservation storage unit, etc. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Decide before derivation display. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. . In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the change of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting the open state for the big winning opening etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the next round game when the upper limit number has not been reached. The process etc. which wait until it is started are included. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to the success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 33 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S271). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S271 (step S271; No), a predetermined random number value is used as the hold data stored in the head area of the second special figure hold storage unit. The numerical data shown is read (step S272). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning in the second start winning opening in the process of step S129 shown in FIG. 34 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S272, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S273). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of step S273, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by one. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S274).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S271 (step S271; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S275). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S275 is executed when it is determined in step S271 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed through the start winning opening, regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the start opening data indicating which game ball has passed through the second start winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S276, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S277). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of step S277, the total number of pending storages may be updated by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S274 and S278, the special figure display result, which is a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S279). As an example, in the process of step S279, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variation random number buffer.

  In the process of step S279, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. The display result is determined as “big hit”. The probability variation state is started when the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability variation” or “surprise probability”, for example, by the big hit end processing in step S117 shown in FIG. Is done. When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to result in a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  CPU103 determines whether the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is "big hit" (step S280). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S280; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S281). Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S282). As an example, in the process of step S282, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the numerical value to be compared with the random number for determining the jackpot type is any of the plurality of jackpot types. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the variation random number buffer.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S283). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  If the special symbol display result is not “big hit” in step S280 (step S280; No), or after executing the process of step S283, a fixed special symbol to be a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined. (Step S284). As an example, if it is determined in step S280 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S280 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S282. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S284, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S285), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S285, when the next timer interruption occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 33 is executed.

  In step S275, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S275; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S286), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for designating a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Determine. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 of FIG. 33 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263).

  In the process of step S262, for example, a big hit variation pattern is determined using a big hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern reading read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 40 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” that does not reach the reach state and “reach” that reaches the reach state. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of them and corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern. . The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 41 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 39, for example, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are determined as the usage patterns at the ratio shown in FIG. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 39, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 41 (B1), for example, at the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 39, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 41 (B2), for example. In the process of step S263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 is the reach in the normal reach such as the variation pattern PA3-1. It is set so as to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the effect. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIG. 41B1 and FIG. 41B2, the determined values assigned to the variation pattern with the reach effect in the normal reach such as the variation pattern PA2-1 are the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern with the reach effect in the super reach such as -3. Thereby, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is increased.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 41 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “159” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, each of the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value so that the average variable display time can be shortened. It is sufficient that a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. In normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, the same table data as when the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value is used regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. With reference to this, the determination of the variation pattern may be performed. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 41 (B1) is read as the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 41 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol hold memories. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, each of the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value so that the average variable display time can be shortened. It is sufficient that a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. During the time reduction in which the time reduction control is performed, the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, the same table data as when the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value is used regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. With reference to this, the determination of the variation pattern may be performed. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 41B2 regardless of the first special figure reservation storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 41 (B2) is read as the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S264). The special symbol variation time that becomes the variable display time of the special symbol is a time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 40, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of steps S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the processing of step S264, a special game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S265 is executed, a command transmission setting at the time of starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 33 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC mounted on the production control board 12. Perform register settings, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. In the command analysis process, for example, when there is a reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the received command.

  Following the command analysis processing, error notification processing is executed (step S75). In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5 under control of the effect control CPU 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or output.

  Following the error notification process, the effect control process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is obtained by software as various random values used for effect control. Update. After execution of the effect random number update process, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 42 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc. to determine whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15. Is determined (step S291). At this time, if there is no received command (step S291; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S291 (step S291; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot start designation command (step S292). ). If the command is a big hit start designation command (step S292; YES), after updating so that the consecutive-chan count count value K is incremented by 1 (step S293), the process returns to step S291. The continuous channel count value K is a value stored in a continuous channel counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and may be any value that indicates the continuous channel count. Here, the continuous change means that the variable display result becomes “big hit” when the probability change state or the time saving state is set, and the control is changed to the probability change state or the time reduction state even after the big hit gaming state is finished. That means. In addition, the number of consecutive chunks means that the variable display result is “big hit” when the probability change state or the short time state is reached, and it is continuously controlled to the probability change state or the short time state even after the big hit gaming state ends. Say the number of times.

  If the received command is not a big hit start designation command in step S292 (step S292; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step S294). If it is a big winning opening prize designation command (step S294; YES), the prize ball number count value is updated by 15 (step S295). The winning ball count value is a value stored in a winning ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and may be any value indicating the number of winning balls. Here, the number of winning balls means the number of game balls paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hit.

  After executing the process of step S295, the cumulative prize number count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S296), and the process returns to step S291. The cumulative prize ball count value is a value stored in a cumulative prize ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may be any value indicating the cumulative prize ball number. Here, the cumulative number of winning balls refers to the number of game balls that are paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hits in the chain. In addition, both the number of winning balls and the number of accumulated winning balls, including the number of payouts for winning in the first and second start winning mouths and the general winning mouth, Good. Further, if it is not a big hit, it is not necessary to add the prize ball count value and the cumulative prize ball count value.

  If it is determined in step S294 that the received command is not a big prize opening prize designation command (step S294; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a big hit end designation command (step S297). If it is a big hit end designation command (step S297; YES), the prize ball number counter is cleared to initialize the count value to “0” (step S298), and the process returns to step S291.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. Thus, the winning ball count value is incremented by 15 and the count value is initialized to “0” in response to the end of the current jackpot gaming state, thereby controlling the jackpot gaming state. Each time, the number of game balls paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

  If the received command is not a jackpot end designation command at step S297 (step S297; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command (step S299). If it is a gaming state designation command (step S299; YES), it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is ended based on the received gaming state designation command (step S300). When the time-shortening control is completed (step S300; YES), the count value is initialized to “0” by clearing the cumulative prize ball number counter (step S301).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening in the continuous game, a winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as a winning ball every time it is detected. The accumulated prize ball count value is incremented by 15 and the count value is initialized to “0” in response to the end of the chain, so that The number of game balls paid out in response to winning in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

  After executing the process in step S301, the counter value is reset to “0” by clearing the continuous number of times counter (step S302), and the process returns to step S291.

  As described above, in this embodiment, every time the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the count value K of the consecutive chants is incremented by 1 and the count value K is “ By being initialized to “0”, the number of consecutive chunks is counted.

  If the received command is not a gaming state designation command in step S299 (step S297; NO), settings are made according to other received commands (step S303), and the process returns to step S291.

  In the above, an example is shown in which the continuous-chan count counter is immediately cleared when the time-shortening control is finished. However, when a big hit is again made within a specific period after the continuous-chan ends, the continuous-chan count may be taken over. .

  In the command analysis process, for example, when a winning determination result command and a first reserved storage number notification command are received together with the first start opening winning designation command, a first start winning provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like is received. The first start port winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage region with the smallest hold display number serving as the buffer number among the free areas in the hour command buffer, or the second start port When the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the winning designation command, the storage with the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number among the empty areas in the second start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area or the like of the RAM 122 is stored. In the area, the second start opening prize designation command and the second reserved memory number notification command are stored in order. Also performed.

  A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer so that a set of effect control commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first starting winning can be stored in association with each other. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start winning is generated, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer according to the receiving order. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  A storage area is secured in the second start winning command buffer so that a set of effect control commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second starting win can be stored in association with each other. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, in accordance with the reception order, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S75 of FIG. 42 as the error notification process. In this error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an error notification period based on, for example, a notification control pattern (step S141).

  If it is not the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), it is determined whether a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). At this time, if no magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received (step S142; NO), the error notification processing is terminated.

  If a magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), after performing operation control for executing error notification in the highest layer (step S143), the error notification processing is terminated. To do. Further, even when it is the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), after performing the operation control for executing error notification in the highest layer (step S143), the error notification process is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S143, in order to execute error notification according to a predetermined notification mode in accordance with notification control execution data read from a notification control pattern prepared in advance for executing error notification, various commands are issued. What is necessary is just to produce and transmit with respect to the display control part 123, the audio | voice control board | substrate 13, the lamp | ramp control board | substrate 14, etc. FIG. Thereby, for example, error notification such as displaying an error notification image as shown in FIG. 64A on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The error notification image shown in FIG. 64 (A) is a message “Error occurred! Please call a staff member” in response to detecting an act of illegally guiding a game ball to the winning opening using a magnet. And a pictogram image AR1 indicating a pictogram for notifying that an error has occurred. The pictogram image AR1 only needs to be displayed in a predetermined display mode corresponding to the error notification. The display time of the error notification image may be 30 seconds, for example. The display time of the error notification image may be varied depending on the type of error.

  In the present embodiment, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image for probability change confirmation notification effect as a third notification for notifying that a predetermined probability change control condition has been established, and a winning ball during a big hit as a specific period As the first notification for notifying the number of prize balls that have been paid out, the prize ball number notification effect image for the notification of the number of winning balls and the continuous number of times for notification of the consecutive number of times as the fourth notification for notifying the number of consecutive times Other effect images such as the jackpot / medium name music name notification image for the big hit / medium name notification as the fifth notification for notifying the music name being played during the jackpot and the music name being played during the jackpot are arranged in different layers. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65A, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a prize ball number notification effect image, and other effect images are superimposed on each image data. The Z value used for drawing is set, and the RAM 122 that provides the work area of the effect control CPU 120 has an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a winning ball number notification effect image, and others. A Z value setting table for setting the Z value of the image data of the effect image is stored. In this Z value setting table, Z values used when drawing an image are registered in association with items of each image data.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, an image having a small Z value is drawn on the near side, and an image having a large Z value is drawn on the far side. That is, an image with a small Z value is drawn so as to overlap an image with a large Z value, and an image with a small Z value is preferentially displayed. That is, it can be visually recognized that an image having a small Z value is on the near side for the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65A, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the prize ball The Z value of the number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the other effect images such as the continuous change number notification image and the big hit medium song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. In other words, when performing an effect process when the attacker opens, which will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially displays the award ball number notification effect image over the continuous number of times notification image or the jackpot music name notification image, and the prize ball Control is performed such that the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed with priority over the number notification effect image, and the error notification image is displayed with priority over the probability change determination notification effect image.

  Note that the Z value is set to “2” not only for the award ball number notification effect image, but also for the cumulative number of award balls that have been paid out as a winning ball during a big hit during consecutive times as a special period. The cumulative prize ball number notification effect image for the cumulative prize ball number notification effect as the second notification is also set to “2” in the Z value. Furthermore, not only an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a prize ball number notification effect image, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect image, a continuous number of times notification image, a jackpot song name notification image, a background image as a background, etc. Z values are also set, and for these background images and the like, a larger Z value is set than the continuous change number notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image.

  Further, the priority of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different depending on whether it is the first hit or not. Further, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be varied depending on the number of consecutive channels. It should be noted that the display mode of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different depending on whether it is the initial hit or the continuous change.

  Moreover, you may subdivide the priority of a prize ball number notification effect image. For example, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image may be different between the case where the number of prize balls is “2000” and the case where the number of prize balls is “2400”. The display mode of the prize ball number notification effect image may be varied depending on whether the number of prize balls is “2000” or “2400”.

  Moreover, you may subdivide the priority of a cumulative prize ball number notification effect image. For example, the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be different between the case where the cumulative prize ball number is “5000” and the case where the prize ball number is “10000”. It should be noted that the display mode of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be different depending on whether the number of prize balls is “5000” or “10000”.

  Further, the priority of the continuous change count notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the continuous channel number notification image may be varied depending on the continuous channel number notification image. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous channel number notification image may be varied depending on how many continuous channels.

  Also, the priority of the jackpot song name notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the jackpot medium song name notification image may be varied depending on the song. In addition, according to a music, you may change the display mode of a jackpot music name notification image.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 executes the sound volume status display process and the jackpot music determination process, and then selects one of steps S330 to S335 according to the value of the effect process flag. Process. In each process, the following process is executed.

  In the variable display start waiting process, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process.

  In the variable display start setting process, control is performed so that the variation of the decorative design is started. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display.

  In the variable display effect processing, the switching timing of each variation state constituting the variation pattern is controlled and the end of the variation time is monitored. When the variation time is over, based on the reception of the effect control command for instructing the stop of all symbols, control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbols and derive and display the display result. The value of the production process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure.

  In the special figure waiting process, after the variation time is over, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the production process when the attacker is released.

  In the attacker opening effect processing, control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening or a command for opening a special prize opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  In the ending effect process, the image display device 5 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process.

  In the effect control process, the hold display setting process may be executed before executing steps S330 to S335. The hold display setting process is performed, for example, when the first start winning or the second start winning occurs, when the first hold display on the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL. For example, determination processing, setting processing, etc. for executing a pre-reading notice effect of “change in hold display” using stored data in a hold display data storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 121, for example. including.

  As will be described below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of volume adjustment as an example of effect adjustment related to a game in accordance with a player's operation. That is, the volume from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a volume state display process (step S311). The volume status display process includes a process for displaying the adjustment status of the volume adjustment. Specifically, in the volume status display process, in a game state other than during the super reach effect or a waiting state for the customer and not in an error display state, the volume adjustment is performed regardless of whether the player operates the stick controller 31A or the like. This includes processing for displaying a volume status display image VL indicating the adjustment status on the display screen of the image display device 5 so as to be visible.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S311 of FIG. 45 as the volume status display process. In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is being performed (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the change is a super reach change pattern and a reach effect period.

  When the super reach effect is not being performed in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach performance. Data indicating the ON state or the OFF state of the super reach operation flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  If the super-reach operation flag is not set to ON in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying a volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S603). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 54, a volume status display image VL indicating the current volume output level is displayed on the image display device 5 as the volume status display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the volume status display image VL has five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side, and the volume corresponding to the current volume in the image display section. Only the image is displayed from the left end.

  Specifically, when the sound volume is at a predetermined minimum level, the image display is such that all five image display sections are turned off. Note that the lowest level may be the mute level. Further, in the case of the first level that is one level higher than the lowest level, the image display is in the form in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one level higher than the first level, the image display is in a state in which two image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the third level, which is one higher than the second level, the image display is in a state in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one higher than the third level, the image display is in a state in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the maximum level, the image display is in a state where all the five image display sections are lit. Thus, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL has a meter-type display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display modes such as a numeric-type display mode or a color-type display mode are used. The display mode may be used.

  If the super reach operation flag has been set in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control is performed to keep the volume display on the image display device 5 (step S604), and the super reach operation flag is set. Is reset to the off state (step S605). Steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 57C described later. Thereby, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect, and once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased.

  After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, the presence / absence of a volume change operation is determined (step S606). If there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (step S606; Yes), a display for displaying the changed volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 While executing the control, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting is executed such that the audio control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (step S1). S607).

  For example, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the lit state of the image display section is increased by one. While being displayed on the image display device 5, the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R is increased by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the left direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. The sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

  After executing the process of step S607, it is determined whether or not the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S608). The non-super-reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A when the super-reach effect is not being performed. Data indicating the on state or off state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than the super reach is set to the on state (step S609).

  After executing the process of step S608 or when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to ON in step S609 (step S609; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. (Step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period after the operation may be until the predetermined period elapses after the first operation, or may be until the predetermined period elapses from the last operation when there are a plurality of operations within the predetermined period. . In this embodiment, the predetermined period after the operation is set, but the predetermined period may elapse from the start of displaying the volume state display image VL.

  Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being performed (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S612). When the non-super-reach operation flag is in an off state (step S612; No), it is determined whether or not the super-reach operation flag is set in an on state (step S613). When the super reach operation flag is in the off state (step S613; No), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S614). Steps S613 and S614 are processing for preventing the volume status display during the super reach effect as a general rule, as shown in FIG. 56A described later. Specifically, in the second state in which the super reach effect is executed, that is, in the game state during the super reach effect, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 54 (C) to (H) to be described later unless requested by the player. The volume status display image VL is not displayed on the screen. Thereby, during execution of the super reach effect that is an example of the game effect that the player particularly wants to show, the volume state display image VL can be prevented from being displayed, and the decrease in the effect of the super reach effect can be suppressed.

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off in step S609 (step S609; No), if the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S610 (step S610; No), the process of step S611 is executed. After that, when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S612 (step S612; Yes), the super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S613 (step S613). ; Yes), after executing the process of step S614, the volume state display process is terminated.

  Note that according to the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46, the volume status display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 executes a jackpot music determination process following the volume status display process (step S312).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit mid-music determination process. Here, the jackpot song is a song that can be played during the jackpot game state, and in this embodiment, a plurality of types of songs are prepared. The prepared types of music will be described later.

  In the jackpot music determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step S621). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is being hit when the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received and the jackpot end designation command is not received. If the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5, it may be determined that the big hit is being made. When the big hit is being made (step S621; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit is abrupt (step S622). For example, the CPU 12 for effect control determines whether or not the big hit corresponds to suddenly based on a special winning opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is not a big hit (step S621; No) or when it is abrupt (step S622; Yes), the big hit middle music determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is a big hit (step S621; Yes) and not correct (step S622; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the music determined flag is on ( Step S623). Here, the music determined flag indicates whether or not the jackpot music has been determined, and is set to an on state in step S633, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in step S636. Data indicating the on / off state of the music determined flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  When the music determination completed flag is off (step S623; No), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the continuous number of times counter provided in the RAM 122 as described above, and determines whether or not it is the first hit (step). S624).

  In step S624, when it is the first hit (step S624; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a music-type reach (step S625). Here, the music-type reach is a reach in which music corresponding to the type of the reach is reproduced during reach production. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A as an example, super reach A to C are set as music-type reach. In the music-type reach, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced in a predetermined manner during the super reach production. The music playback mode in the music-type reach will be described together in the description of the example of production described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S625, if it is a music-based reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a jackpot song according to the reach type (step S626). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), if the reach type is Super Reach A, the jackpot song is determined to be “Song A”, and if it is Super Reach B, the jackpot song is “Music”. B ”, and if it is Super Reach C, the big hit song is decided to be“ Song C ”.

  If it is not the first hit in step S624 (step S624; No), or the first hit (step S624; Yes), but not the music-based reach big hit (step S625; No), the production control CPU 120 is a big hit game. It is determined whether or not the first round in which the number of round games executed in the state is “1” is being executed (step S627). For example, whether or not it is the first round can be determined by confirming which round number command is stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area.

  When the first round is being executed (step S627; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 outputs the specific part of the selected music piece (step S628). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 transmits to the audio control board 13 a command for outputting the specific part of the selected music to the audio control board 13, and the selected music from the speakers 8L and 8R. The specific part of is output. That is, in the process of step S628, only the climax part of the currently selected jackpot music is played.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48C, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music that can be selected during the execution of the first round are prepared. Further, as shown in FIG. 48C, the number of pieces of music that can be selected during the execution of the first round is set to increase in accordance with the increase in the number of consecutive chunks. Specifically, in this embodiment, when 1 ≦ K ≦ 5, it is possible to select from three songs, when 6 ≦ K ≦ 10, four songs can be selected, and when 11 ≦ K ≦ 15, five songs can be selected. It is possible to select from six pieces of music when 16 ≦ K.

  For example, when K = 2, the number of songs that can be selected from the first hit increases by one, and when K = 3, the number of songs that can be selected from the first hit increases by two. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which selectable songs are sequentially increased by the number of consecutive chunks. Also, it is determined by lottery whether or not a new song can be selected each time a big hit is made and whether or not any kind of song can be selected, not according to the prescribed number of consecutive times. Also good. In addition to the super reach A to C shown in FIG. 48A, for example, a super reach D that is executed only during probability change is provided. It may be configured such that the corresponding music piece D can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), the music is selected by placing the cursor CU on the image displayed on the image display device 5 and showing the currently selectable music. The music selection operation is performed, for example, when the player tilts the stick controller 31A in the vertical direction. In this case, the image indicating the music name moves in accordance with the operation, and the music corresponding to the music image that is aligned with the cursor CU becomes the currently selected music. That is, in step S628, when the target of the cursor CU moves to another music piece, the chorus portion of the music piece that has been moved to is reproduced.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (C), when music is added as the number of consecutive chunks increases, the initial position of the cursor CU is preferably set to the position indicating the added music. . By so doing, it is possible to suitably notify the player of newly added music. However, when the same music piece is selected in a predetermined big hit just before, it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU be the position indicating the same music piece. By doing so, it is possible to present music that suits the player's preference, which is user-friendly.

  In addition, it is good also as an aspect to which cursor CU moves according to selection operation with respect to the image which shows a music title. In addition, the method of indicating the currently selected music is not limited to the instruction by the cursor CU. It is easier to visually recognize the image indicating the selected music than the image indicating the other music, or the music other than the selected music is displayed. The displayed image may be difficult to view or may not be visible. Further, at the time of music selection, the volume level may be increased and the music identification unit may be output. For example, when the current volume level is a normal level, when a song is selected, a specific part is output at the fourth level or the fifth level, or the current volume level is the lowest level or the first level. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the specific part is output at the normal level when the music is selected.

  Further, the “specific part” is a part of the selected music and is different from the head of the music. In this embodiment, so-called “rust” is an example of a music specifying unit. Here, in this embodiment, each piece of music data of the songs A to F as the big hit medium songs is stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the music data which shows one music is comprised from several audio | voice data containing the data for chorus which shows the audio | voice of chorus. Specifically, as illustrated with respect to “Song A” in FIG. 49A, the data indicating the entire song A includes intro data, A melody data, B melody data, chorus data, It is stored in the ROM 121 in a divided form such as outro data. The same applies to each of the songs B to F as other jackpot songs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden of data capacity compared to a configuration in which specific part data is stored in addition to data for one song. In addition, during a predetermined production such as during a reach production of a music-type reach or during a notice production, only a part of the music may be output during the predetermined production by using a part of the data of one piece of music alone. Good. In this way, as in this embodiment, it is possible to take advantage of the configuration of storing data indicating one piece of music as divided data.

  As for the chorus data as an example of the specific part data, for each piece of music, for example, a part that is familiar, has an impact, and is assumed to be catchy is selected in advance as “rust”, and the chorus part Audio data may be prepared in advance as chorus data. In addition, for example, the song A is famous for “rust”, but the song C is more famous for “A melody”. In this case, for the music C, the specific part is set to A melody, and if the music C is being selected in step S628, the A melody portion may be reproduced. Further, the so-called head chorus music may be included in the jackpot music. And a specific part may be the head of a music. That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music. Further, when the head chorus music is included in the jackpot music, the data used as the music data for the head chorus music may be common when the music is selected and after the music is determined. For example, at the time of music selection, the chorus data and the part data following the chorus are used to play back the chorus and the parts following the chorus, and after the music is determined, the chorus and the chorus You may play it back with the part that follows the chorus.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a music determination operation has been performed following the processing of step S628 (step S629). For example, the music determination operation is a pressing operation performed on the push button 31B, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that there is a music determination operation when the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B. When there is no music determination operation (step S629; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the special winning opening (step S630). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that it is the closing timing of the big prize opening when the first round big prize opening closing designation command is received from the main board 11. Then, when there is a music determination operation (step S629; Yes), or when it is the closing prize closing timing (step S630; No), the currently selected music is determined (step S631). That is, in this embodiment, when the music determination operation is performed before the grand prize opening is closed during execution of the first round, or when the grand prize opening is closed without performing the music determination operation, The selected music is determined to be a big hit music.

  As described above, in this embodiment, at the time of music selection, the specific part of the music being selected is played back, and there are a plurality of music determination methods at the time of music selection. For this reason, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  Following the processing of step S626 and step S631, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the music information determined in step S626 or S631 in the RAM 122 (step S632), and sets the music determination completed flag to the on state (step S633). . In addition, the data which shows ON / OFF of a music determined flag is memorize | stored in the production | presentation control flag setting part of RAM122, for example.

  Returning to step S623, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the music determination completed flag is on (step S623; Yes), the big hit medium music determined in step S626 or S631 is reproduced (step S634). Subsequently, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit end timing (step S635), and if it is a big hit end timing (step S635; Yes), the reproduction of the music started to be played in step S634 is ended. The music determined flag is cleared to an off state (step S636).

  After the execution of the processes of steps S636 and S633, when the determination is NO in steps S621, S627, S630, and S635, or when the determination is YES in step S622, the big hit / medium determination process is terminated.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 48A, in the reach other than the music-based reach, the hit-hit music can be selected by the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round. In this embodiment, “reach: normal (big hit)” shown in FIG. 40 is prepared as a reach other than the music-type reach, but “super reach D”, “super reach” is provided as a super reach other than the music-type reach. “E” is further provided, and if the big hit is accompanied by the production of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the player can select the big hit hit song by the selection operation by the player during the first round. It is good. Moreover, in the above example, the example in which the hit song during the first round can be selected is shown, but the song may be selected during other rounds, or the song may be selected across multiple rounds. It may be possible. The period during which the jackpot can be selected is arbitrary.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, the music reproduction mode when the big hit music is selected and after the big hit music is determined will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (B), at the time of music selection, the specific part of the music being selected is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The identification unit is continuously played until the selected music is determined. And when the length of a specific part is shorter than the period until the music in selection is determined, a specific part is repeatedly reproduced until the music in selection is determined. If the length of the specific part is shorter than the period until the selected music is determined, the part following the specific part in the selected music may be played following the playback of the specific part. Good.

  In this embodiment, at the time of music selection, an image corresponding to the music being selected is displayed in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. The music-corresponding image is, for example, a moving image such as PV or MV of the selected music, and when selecting the music, for example, a portion corresponding to the specific part of the moving image is reproduced in the display area VA1. Note that the moving image as the music-corresponding image does not have to be reproduced from the part corresponding to the specific part of the music. For example, when music is selected, the music may be played from a specific part other than the head, but the moving image may be played from the head. Further, the music-corresponding image may be a still image indicating an artist photo or the like instead of a moving image. Also, the music-corresponding image data may be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a form divided for each part of the music, like the audio data of the music.

  As shown in FIG. 49C, after the music is determined, one piece of music is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R by connecting the plurality of divided audio data constituting the music data of the determined music. The playback mode of the determined jackpot music is, for example, as described in (a) to (c) below. (B) After the music is determined during one round, the music is played from the continuation of the specific part that was played at the time of selection, or is played from the beginning of the music. (B) From the second round onwards, the music is played from the beginning. (C) In the case of K = 1 and the music-type reach big hit, the music corresponding to the reach type is played from the continuation of the part that was played during the super reach production.

  After the song has been decided, it is played from the beginning of the song, and the big hit has not ended yet. After the song has made a round to the end of the song, even if you return to the intro of the song and play the second round It is also possible to play from rust instead of intro.

  Further, after the music is determined, the music corresponding image is displayed in the display area VA2 shown in FIG. 49C, which is larger than the display area VA1, for example. The example shown in FIG. 49C is an example in which the display area VA2 is configured over the entire image display area of the image display device 5 after the music is determined. After the music is determined, for example, a moving image in which portions corresponding to the music playback portion are sequentially played back may be displayed in the display area VA2. Note that the music corresponding image displayed in the display area VA2 after the music is determined may be a still image such as an artist photo. Moreover, the music corresponding | compatible image at the time of music selection and after a music determination should just be a thing from which a display mode differs. That is, the display mode may be changed by a method other than changing the position and size of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 where the music-corresponding image is displayed. For example, the positions and sizes of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 may be the same, but the music-corresponding image after the music determination may be applied with an effect that is not at the time of music selection.

  Note that the operation means for performing the music selection operation and the determination operation is not limited to the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The operation means may be, for example, a cross button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, a dial key that can be rotated, for example, or may be a touch operation or a press operation like a touch panel. . Moreover, any configuration that can detect the operation content according to the operation by the player is acceptable. A sensor capable of detection may be used.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S331 in FIG. 45 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S321). As the process of step S321, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. To determine the final stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. I just need it.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative design of the non-reach combination is stopped and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the effect control CPU 120 determines different decorative symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and stores a left determined symbol determination table prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. By referencing or the like, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the same decorative symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols that are updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value May be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative symbol, the difference between the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set.

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same decorative design is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It suffices to determine which one is to be a confirmed decorative design. In the jackpot promotion effect, a combination of decorative symbols that reminds the user of the big hit but does not recall the probable change state is once stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the probable state is changed during the big hit game state or at the end of the big hit game state. This is an effect to notify whether or not

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S321, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect is determined. It may be determined. In the redrawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify the player that the decorative symbol is controlled to be variably displayed by variably displaying the decorative symbol again and by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation symbol. In addition, there is a case where the control of the probability variation state is not notified by stopping the display of the decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination after changing the decorative symbol again in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S321, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Subsequent to the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in the process of step S321, a change effect setting process is performed in which execution settings such as a hold display change effect determined in the hold display setting process are performed (step S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit or the like.

  In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 51, first, the stored content in the hold display data storage unit is updated (step S551). That is, the storage data in the storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased in the hold display data storage unit, and the storage data in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” is shifted up by one entry. At this time, the stored data to be erased from the storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” in the hold display data storage unit may be read and stored in the hold display data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold display change timing which is the execution timing of the hold display change effect is reached (step S552). In the process of step S552, for one or a plurality of change effect timing patterns stored in the hold display data storage unit whose storage content has been updated by the process of step S551, it matches the hold number associated with each change effect timing pattern. It is determined whether or not the designation of the hold display change timing to be included is included.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the hold display change timing is reached (step S552; Yes), execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S553). For example, in the process of step S553, the storage content of the hold display change pattern in the hold display data storage unit and the display mode in the current hold display are specified, and whether or not to change the display mode, and the change when changing What is necessary is just to make it the setting etc. which perform the setting of a subsequent display mode, and a pending | holding display change common effect. In the process of step S553, the display color change effect execution setting for changing the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern may be performed among the active display change effects. As the execution setting of the display color change effect, for example, the hold display change pattern indicated in the stored data of the hold display data buffer is specified, and the display mode to be displayed after the active display change effect is executed is set. .

  Returning to FIG. 50, subsequent to the change effect setting process in step S322, a reach effect setting process (described later) for performing the reach effect execution setting is executed (step S323). In the reach effect setting process, execution setting of reach effect is performed.

  Specifically, in the reach effect setting process, it is determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, whether or not the decorative symbol variable display state is “non-reach” that does not enter the reach state. If it is “non-reach”, the reach effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is other than “non-reach”, the reach effect setting process is ended after setting the reach effect according to the variation pattern.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S324). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and sets it as a use pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set it as a use pattern in response to the hold display change effect or the like by the change effect setting process in step S322. In the display change effect control pattern, a hold display change effect period, which is a determination target in the variable display mid-setting process described later, is also set. In addition, it is not limited to what sets a separate production control pattern as a special figure fluctuation production control pattern, a display change production control pattern, and a reach production control pattern, but one production control corresponding to a combination of execution settings of each production A pattern may be set.

  Following the processing in step S324, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step S325). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design etc. on the screen of the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S326). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S324 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the display of the image display device 5 is performed. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the region.

  After executing the processing of step S326, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, such as the first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HL, Settings for updating the hold display and the like are performed (step S327). For example, when a special figure game using the first special figure is executed, the display part corresponding to the holding number “1” is deleted in the first holding display unit 5HR, and the other holding number “2” is deleted. The first hold display in the display parts corresponding to “4” to “4” is moved to the left one by one. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed, the display part corresponding to the holding number “1” is deleted in the second holding display part 5HL, and another holding number “2” is displayed. The second reserved display in the display part corresponding to “4” to “4” is moved to the right one by one. Moreover, in the process of step S327, you may perform the setting for updating the active display in the active display part AHA. In this case, for example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the first hold display section 5HR, the active display similar to the deleted first hold display is displayed in the active display section AHA. Let it begin. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the second hold display portion 5HL, the active display similar to the deleted second hold display is started in the active display portion AHA. .

  After updating the hold display and the like by the process of step S327, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” that is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S328), and then the variable display start setting process is performed. finish.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S332 of FIG. 45 as variable display effect processing. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 52, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time It may be determined that has passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S324 shown in FIG. 50, for example. If it is the hold display change effect period (step S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (step S343). In the process of step S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. In other words, it is only necessary to execute the hold display change effect in a predetermined effect device by combining some or all of them.

  When it is determined in step S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), after executing the process of step S343, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S346. In addition, when it is not a holding | maintenance display change production period (step S342; No), after execution of step S343, the determination process whether it is an active display change production period similarly to the process of the above-mentioned step S342 and S343, for example. Alternatively, control for executing the active display change effect may be executed.

  In step S346, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is a reach production period (step S346; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is super reach (step S346A). When it is determined that it is super reach (step S346A; Yes), a hold display erasing process is executed to delete the hold display displayed on the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL (step S347). . For example, as shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the hold display of the second hold display portion 5HL is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 until the start of the super reach production. As shown in FIG. 54C, when the super reach effect is started by executing the hold display erasing process, the hold display of the second hold display portion 5HL is deleted and the hold display is not displayed. Since the hold display is not displayed during the super reach effect as described above, the image display by the super reach effect can be performed also for the predetermined area portion at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, the player can watch the super reach effect without worrying about the hold display, and can enjoy the effect. Therefore, the reach effect can be fully exhibited.

  The non-display of the hold display is ended by the hold display return control to be described later when the super reach effect ends. That is, the hold display is restored. In this embodiment, the hold display is not displayed during the super reach effect, but may be hidden during the normal reach effect.

  After the process of step S347 is executed, a temporary display process for temporarily displaying the volume status display image VL is executed when there is a request from the player even during the super reach effect (step S347). That is, when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S348 of FIG. 52 as the temporary display process. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701). When the non-super-reach operation flag is set to ON (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), the presence / absence of a volume changing operation is determined (step S703).

  If there is a volume changing operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In this step S704, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, display control for displaying the changed volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed and after the change. Are set in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting is performed such that the sound control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (step S704).

  On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), a volume status display erasure process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S705). The non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S706).

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off at step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S703 (step S703; No), after executing the processing of step S704, After executing the process of step S706, it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S707).

  If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation start is accepted (step S708). If the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, if the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, the current sound volume status is displayed on the image display device 5. Display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S709). As shown in FIG. 55D, during the super reach effect, the current volume state display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the operation of the stick controller 31A. After executing the process of step S709, the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S710).

  In step S707, when the super-reach operation flag is on (step S707; Yes), or after executing the process of step S710, it is determined whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step S712). If there is a volume changing operation (step S712; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction (step S712; Yes), the change according to the number of operations of the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction The display control for displaying the subsequent volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed, and the changed volume setting value corresponding to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the volume setting after the change is performed such as controlling the sound control board 13 (step S607).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is increased by one is displayed on the image display device. 5 and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R increases by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the left direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5 and the speaker. The volume output from 8L and 8R decreases by one level.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711; Yes), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S714). For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the display of the volume state display image VL is deleted. That is, the volume status display is not displayed. In this way, during the super reach production, if there is a player's operation, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed, and if the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display is still in progress. The image VL is erased.

  After executing the process of step S714, the super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S715). Then, when no operation start is accepted at step S708 (step S708; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S712 (step S712; No), after executing the process of step S713, or after step S715. After executing the process, the temporary display process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 52, when it is determined in step S346A that it is not super reach (step S346A; No), after executing the process of step S348, control for executing other reach effects is performed ( Step S349).

  When it is determined in step S346 that it is not the reach production period (step S346; No), after executing the process of step S349, it is determined whether or not it is the hold display return timing (step S349A). When it is determined in step S349A that it is the hold display return timing (step S349A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes hold display return control for returning the hold display (step S349B). For example, when the hold display return timing comes, the hold display is returned as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S349A that it is not the hold display return timing (step S349A; No), after executing the process of step S349B, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. Based on this, control is performed to execute other effects during variable display, including decorative variable display operations (step S350), and the variable display effect processing is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S351). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S351; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S351 (step S351; Yes), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol as a display result is performed (step S352). At this time, a predetermined time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S353). Further, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S354), and then the effect process during variable display is ended.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after the game ball that has been driven into the game area passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and a start winning such as the first starting winning and the second starting winning is generated, a special symbol is generated. And the special symbol variable display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the start condition permitting the start of variable display of the decorative symbols. On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing through the first start winning opening, the processing of steps S123 and S127 shown in FIG. The special figure hold memory number is incremented by one. When the second start condition is established based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing through the second start winning opening, the processing of steps S126 and S127 shown in FIG. The special figure hold memory number is incremented by one. At this time, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the process of step S129. In step S132, the winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 35 is executed to determine the variable display contents such as whether the variable display result is “big hit” or not, and the winning determination result. Is received from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When variable display of a special game or a decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of variation patterns are executed by executing variation pattern setting processing as shown in FIG. 39 in step S111 shown in FIG. And a variation pattern designation command indicating that the determined variation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In step S321 shown in FIG. 50, the final stop symbol and the like are determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command, and then the process shown in FIG. 51 is executed as the change effect setting process in step S322. Is done. In the change effect setting process, when it is determined in step S552 that it is the hold display change timing, execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed in step S553.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, an example of the effect in the super reach effect will be described. FIG. 54 shows an effect example in the case of no volume change operation in the super reach variation display. When variable display of decorative symbols is started, reach effect setting processing in step S323 shown in FIG. 50 is executed. In the reach effect setting process, for example, it is determined that the reach effect in the super reach is executed. This execution example will be described from the time when the decorative symbol variable display state reaches the reach state as shown in FIG. In addition, by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46, a volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Through FIG. 54 (B), the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 54 (C) is executed. The super reach is notified by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 54C on the screen of the image display device 5 or the like. The player can grasp that the super reach production is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the variable display of the decorative symbols is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The reduced display of the variable display of the decorative design can be executed by the process of step S350, for example. Also, the volume status display image VL is deleted from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 54C by the volume status display deletion process shown in FIG. Further, the hold display is deleted by the hold display deleting process shown in FIG. 52, as shown in FIG. 54 (C).

  Subsequently, a super reach effect including a battle effect as shown in FIGS. 54 (D) to (H) is executed. When the battle effect result is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (H), the super reach effect ends, and for example, the final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown in FIG. 54 (I) is derived and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46, and the hold display is returned by the hold display control process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54 (I), the variable display ends when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (I), since the volume state display image VL is displayed at a position not covered by the decorative pattern at the time of the fluctuation stop, the final stop symbol of the decorative pattern, that is, the game result can be visually confirmed. The volume can be adjusted while not obstructing.

  Here, the execution timing and the like of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach variation display shown in FIG. 54 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is no volume change operation in the super reach variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the super reach variation display, since the player has not operated the stick controller 31A at all, the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A remains at a low level. The volume status display is displayed on the image display device 5 except during the super reach production.

  Further, during the production of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 48A, music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced. For example, when super reach notification is executed as shown in FIG. 54 (C), for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the music corresponding to the reach type is intro, A melody, B melody, etc. Are played sequentially. Then, for example, a special effect sound effect is executed for a predetermined period between the effect shown in FIG. 54E and the effect shown in FIG.

  As the effect by the special effect sound, for example, a so-called SE effect such as a sound having an echo effect, a repeat sound, a noise sound, a sound having a fade-in / fade-out may be executed. Moreover, you may silence only for the said predetermined period. In addition to the output of the special effect sound, it is preferable that an effect is applied to the moving image that is reproduced during the production by super reach only for the predetermined period. For example, a mode in which a moving image stops suddenly, a screen is blacked out, a noise display, or the like may be used.

  Then, for example, in response to a predetermined operation from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B being performed during the execution of the special effect sound, or in response to the elapse of a predetermined period, FIG. The battle effect result shown in (H) is displayed, and together with this display, the sound effect for losing to notify the losing is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), rust is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a continuation of the part of the music that was being played during the super reach performance. Thus, before a battle effect result is displayed, a player's sense of expectation can be given by applying a special effect to sound and video.

  Note that the control for executing the reach effect with such special effects can be executed in step S349. Further, the period for executing the special effect may be determined in advance for each variation pattern of the music-type reach, for example. In addition, during the production of the music-type reach, the music may not be played from the beginning, but may be played from A melody, B melody, or the like. In addition, when a big hit is made after the production of the music-type reach, it may be reproduced from the continuation of the portion reproduced during the reach production of the music-type reach during the first round. For example, the A melody may be played during the reach performance, and may be played from the B melody that follows the A melody during the first round. Alternatively, the A melody may be played halfway through the first melody during the reach performance. The music may be reproduced from the continuation of the A melody.

  Next, a case where a volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 shows an effect example in the case where there is a volume changing operation in the super reach variation display. Since FIGS. 55A to 55C are the same as FIGS. 54A to 54C described above, description thereof is omitted. The music playback mode during the super reach production is the same as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 55D, when the stick controller 31A is operated during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed. When the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the lit state of the image display section is increased by one, and the changed volume state display image VL Is displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is deleted as shown in FIG.

  55D, the result of the battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 55H, and the super reach effect ends. For example, the final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown in FIG. 55I is displayed. Derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), since the super reach effect is finished, the changed volume state display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 55D and 55E, the volume status display image VL in the gaming state during the super reach effect is in the gaming state other than the super reach effect as shown in FIG. 55I. Is displayed in the same manner as the display state of the volume state display image VL, so that the display of the volume state display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state may not be the same. For example, the volume state display image VL in the second state may display a different display from the volume state display image VL in the first state at the same display location as that in the first state, or the volume state display image VL in the first state. The same display as the display image VL may be displayed at a display location different from that in the first state, or a display different from the volume state display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a display location different from that in the first state. May be.

  Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display shown in FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation in the super reach variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (B), during the super reach effect, there is an operation of the stick controller 31A by the player, and this operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. That is, the controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A detects a detection signal corresponding to the operation by the player and outputs it to the effect control board 12. In the volume status display, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 over a predetermined period after the operation by the player during the super reach effect.

  Next, the execution timing and the like of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation immediately before the start of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the start of the super reach effect. Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume state display image VL is started. Then, since the super reach effect starts within a predetermined period after the operation, that is, within the predetermined period from the start of display of the volume status display image VL, the volume status display image VL is started at the start timing of the super reach effect unless any measures are taken. Will be erased on the way. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed by steps S701 to S706 in the temporary display process shown in FIG. Yes. Thus, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed in an extended manner, and the volume status display image VL is displayed halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect. Can be prevented from being erased. In the example shown in FIG. 57A, it is ensured that the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period after the operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the volume state display image VL may be displayed for a predetermined period from the start timing of the super reach effect.

  Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57C is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (C), the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the end of the super reach effect. Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume state display image VL is started. Then, since the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period from the start of the display of the volume state display image VL, the volume state display image VL is displayed when the predetermined period elapses if no measures are taken. Will be displayed again after being erased. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is obtained from the step S601, step S602, step S604, and step S605 in the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46 described above. It is displayed continuously as it is after the end of. Thereby, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. It is possible to omit a useless process of once erasing and displaying again.

  From here, the effect process at the time of attacker opening shown in FIG. 45 is demonstrated. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect process when the attacker is released. In the attacker opening effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end designation command has been received (step S181). At this time, if no jackpot end designation command is received (step S181; NO), the first round to the fourth round in which the number of round games executed in the jackpot gaming state is “1” to “4” is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S182).

  If it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are being executed (step S182; YES), the rendering operation that is the promotion effect during the big hit is controlled (step S183). Thus, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first to fourth rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot promotion effect as the sixth notification serving as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probability variation state is performed. Executed.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display is performed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  When it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are not being executed (step S182; NO), after executing the process of step S183, notification that a predetermined probability variation control condition has been established is notified. Effect operation control for executing the certainty change confirmation notifying effect for performing is performed (step S184). The effect control CPU 120 is based on variable display contents such as a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control condition is satisfied. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a probability change control condition for establishing a probability change state after the big hit game state is satisfied in response to a game ball passing through a specific area of the game board. In this case, a specific area switch is provided in the specific area, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the probability variation control condition is satisfied when the specific area switch detects the passage of the game ball.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S184 of FIG. 58 as the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process. In the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the probability change confirmation notification effect period based on the effect control pattern, for example (step S801).

  If it is not the probability change confirmation notification effect period in step S801 (step S801; NO), it is determined whether or not a probability change confirmation notification command has been received (step S802). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification command has not been received (step S802; NO), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  If a probability change confirmation notification command is received in step S802 (step S802; YES), or if it is a probability change confirmation notification production period in step S801 (step S801; YES), error notification is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S803). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S803; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect in the uppermost layer (step S804), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation is performed. The control process ends. For example, in the process of step S804, in order to execute a certain change confirmation notification effect according to a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern prepared in advance to execute the certain change confirmation notification effect. Various commands may be generated and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, for example, a probability change confirmation notification effect such as that shown in FIG. 64 (B) is displayed on the highest layer.

  In addition, Step S805, Steps S818 to S820, Steps S370 to S372, Steps S465 to S468, and Steps S475 to S479 related to the effect operation control, which will be described later, are also read from the effect control patterns prepared in advance, as in Step S804. In order to execute an effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data, various commands may be created and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like.

  The probability variation confirmation notification effect image shown in FIG. 64 (B) includes a character image MM2 that reports a message “probability variation!” In response to the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. Note that the display time of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be, for example, 20 seconds.

  If error notification is being executed in step S803 (step S803; YES), after performing operation control to execute the probability change confirmation notification effect in a layer lower than the layer for which error notification is being executed. (Step S805), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1” and registered. As a result, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to preferentially execute error notification over the probability change confirmation notification effect, such as displaying the probability change confirmation notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Do.

  After executing such a probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process in step S184 of FIG. 58, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit is executed. Production operation control is performed (step S185).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S185 in FIG. 58 as the prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In the award ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the award ball number notification effect period based on the effect control pattern, for example (step S811).

  If it is not the prize ball number notification effect period in step S811 (step S811; NO), the number of prize balls for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit has reached “2000” It is determined whether or not the effect has been executed (step S812). In the process of step S812, for example, a 2000 arrival flag is set that is set to ON when notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit has reached “2000”. The determination may be made based on whether or not the 2000 arrival flag is in the ON state.

  As in step S812, in each of the processes in steps S814, S363, and S365, which will be described later, for example, when it is notified that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball has reached “predetermined”. An arrival flag that is set in the state is provided, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the arrival flag is in the on state.

  If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S812 has reached “2000” has not been executed (step S812; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “2000” or more (step S813). At this time, when the prize ball count value is not “2000” or more (step S813; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S812 has reached “2000” has been executed (step S812; YES), It is determined whether or not a prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball has reached “2400” has been executed (step S814).

  If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S814 has reached “2400” has been executed (step S814; YES), The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S814 has reached “2400” has not been executed (step S814; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “2400” or more (step S815). At this time, if the prize ball number count value is not equal to or greater than “2400” (step S815; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball count value is “2000” or more in step S813 (step S813; YES), or when the prize ball count value is “2400” or more in step S815 (step S815; YES). If it is the prize ball number notification effect period in step S811 (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S816).

  If the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed in step S816 (step S816; NO), it is determined whether error notification is being executed (step S817). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S817; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect in the highest layer (step S818), the number of prize balls is notified. The effect operation control process ends. Thereby, for example, a prize ball number notification effect such as displaying a prize ball number notification effect image as shown in FIG. 64C on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 64 (C) notifies the message “2000 GET” in response to the fact that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit has reached “2000”. It includes a character image MM3 and a character image CA1 in which the message “2000 GET” is emitted as a dialogue. The display time of the prize ball number notification effect image may be, for example, 10 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S817 (step S817; YES), operation control for executing a prize ball number notification effect is performed in a layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is being executed. After (step S819), the award ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially executes the error notification over the prize ball number notification effect such that the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Take control.

  If the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S816 (step S816; YES), an operation for executing the prize ball number notification effect in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the control (step S820), the award ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the winning ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 prioritizes the probability change confirmation notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect in which the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  In FIG. 60, when the process of step S820 is performed, the award ball number notification effect operation control process is ended, but the process of step S817 may be executed following the process of step S820. That is, operation control in a plurality of layers may be performed collectively in one execution of the award ball number notification effect operation control process. The same applies to other similar operation control processes.

  After performing such a prize ball number notification effect operation control process in step S185 of FIG. 58, the cumulative number of prize balls for notifying the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous chain. Effect operation control for executing the notification effect is performed (step S186).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S186 of FIG. 58 as the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing. In this cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot promotion effect has ended (step S361). In the process of step S361, for example, a jackpot promotion effect flag that is turned on during execution of the jackpot promotion effect is provided, and determination may be made based on whether or not the jackpot promotion effect flag is on. .

  If the jackpot promotion effect has not ended in step S361 (step S361; NO), the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process ends. Thus, in this embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed until the jackpot promotion effect ends. This is an important effect that the player should pay attention to whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit in the first round to the fourth round in this embodiment is a promotion in which the gaming state becomes a probable state. However, until the end of the promotion effect during the big hit, whether the continuous Chang will continue by executing the cumulative prize-ball notification effect that will improve the effect on the premise that the continuous Chang will continue This is so as not to reduce the degree of attention to the promotion effect during the big hit, which also informs whether or not.

  In step S361, when the jackpot promotion effect has ended (step S361; YES), it is determined based on, for example, the effect control pattern whether or not it is the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period (step S362). ).

  If it is not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period in step S362 (step S362; NO), it is confirmed that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in consecutive chan has reached “5000”. It is determined whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect to be notified has been executed (step S363).

  In step S363, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the consecutive game has reached “5000” has not been executed (step S363). S363; NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “5000” or more (step S364). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count value is not equal to or greater than “5000” (step S364; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  In step S363, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “5000” has been executed (step S363). S363; YES), it is determined whether or not the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “10000” has been executed. (Step S365).

  In step S365, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “10000” has been executed (step S365). S365; YES), the accumulated prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  In step S365, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “10000” has not been executed (step S35). S365; NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “10000” or more (step S366). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count value is not equal to or greater than “10000” (step S366; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the cumulative prize ball count value is “5000” or more in step S364 (step S364; YES), or when the cumulative prize ball count value is “10000” or more in step S366 (step S366; YES). In step S362, when it is the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period (step S362; YES), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S367).

  When the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S367 (step S367; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. Thus, in this embodiment, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize number notification effect is not executed. This is because the prize ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect are similar to each other, and if executed simultaneously, the degree of attention to any effect may be reduced. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect is preferentially executed over the cumulative prize ball number notification effect. Note that a reduction in the degree of attention to any effect may be prevented by preferentially executing the accumulated prize ball number notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect.

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S367 (step S367; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S368). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S368; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S369).

  If error notification is not being executed in step S369 (step S369; NO), operation control for executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is performed in the highest layer (step S370), and then the cumulative prize is received. The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. Thereby, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect such as that shown in FIG. 64 (D) is displayed on the highest layer.

  The cumulative prize-ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 64D corresponds to the fact that the cumulative prize-ball number paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous chain reaches “5000”. A character image MM4 for informing a message “OVER!” And a character image CA2 in which the message “5000 OVER!” Is emitted as a dialogue are included. In addition, the display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be, for example, 10 seconds.

  If the error notification is being executed in step S369 (step S369; YES), operation control is performed to execute the cumulative prize ball notification effect in a layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is being executed. (Step S371), the accumulated prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the error notification over the cumulative prize ball notification effect such as displaying the cumulative prize ball notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Perform control to be executed.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S368 (step S368; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S372), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the cumulative award ball notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the cumulative prize ball notification effect image to be displayed in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  In step S186 of FIG. 58, after such cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing is executed, operation control is performed to execute the continuous-chan number notification for informing the continuous-chan number (step S187).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S187 of FIG. 58 as the continuous channel number notification operation control process. In this continuous number of times notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S461). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S461; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S462).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S462 (step S462; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S463). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S463; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S464).

  When the error notification is not being executed in step S464 (step S464; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the continuous channel number notification in the highest layer (step S465), the continuous channel number notification is performed. The operation control process ends. Thereby, for example, continuous channel count notification such as that shown in FIG. 64 (E) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

  64E includes a character image MM5 for notifying the message “big hit × N” corresponding to the number of consecutive chunks. In addition, the notification time of the continuous number of times may be 5 seconds, for example.

  If error notification is being executed in step S464 (step S464; YES), after performing operation control for executing continuous channel count notification in a layer lower than the layer in which error notification is being executed. (Step S466), the continuous channel number notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0” and the Z value of the continuous change number notification image is set to “3” and registered. As a result, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to preferentially execute error notification over continuous channel number notification, such as displaying a continuous channel number notification image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Do.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S463 (step S463; YES), the operation control for executing the continuous change number notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. (Step S467), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the continuous change count notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the certain change confirmation notification effect rather than the continuous change number notification, such as displaying the continuous change number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the certain change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Perform control to be executed.

  When the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 (step S462; YES), the continuous number of times notification is executed in a lower layer than the layer where the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S468), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the continuous number of times notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the effect of notifying the number of consecutive balls over the notification of the number of times of consecutive chants, such as displaying the consecutive number of times of informing notification image in a layer lower than the layer where the prize ball number informing effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S461 (step S461; YES), the consecutive number of times notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer where the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control for this (step S469), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the continuous number of times notification image is set to “3” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the cumulative number-of-balls notification effect to be displayed rather than the continuous number-of-times notification, such as displaying the continuous number-of-times notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the cumulative number-of-balls notification effect image. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  58, after executing such continuous-changing number notification operation control processing, the big hit mid-music name notification operation control processing for informing the music name being played during the big hit is executed (step S188). ).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S188 of FIG. 58 as the jackpot music name notification operation control process. In the jackpot song name notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S471). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S471; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S472).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S472 (step S472; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S473). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S473; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S474).

  When error notification is not being executed in step S474 (step S474; NO), after performing operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification in the highest layer (step S475), the big hit middle song The name notification operation control process is terminated. Thereby, for example, the big hit mid-music name notification such as displaying the big hit mid-music name notification image as shown in FIG. 64 (F) on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The jackpot / medium song name notification shown in FIG. 64 (F) includes a character image MM6 for reporting a message “MUSIC: xxxxxxxx” corresponding to the song name being played during the jackpot. The music name notification time may be, for example, 30 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S474 (step S474; YES), operation control is performed to execute song name notification during jackpot in a layer lower than the layer in which error notification is being executed. After (step S476), the big hit medium music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control preferentially executes the error notification over the jackpot song name notification, such as displaying the jackpot song name notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the error notification image. Take control.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S473 (step S473; YES), an operation for executing the jackpot song name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the control (step S477), the big hit mid-music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the jackpot music name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control prioritizes the probability change confirmation notification effect over the big hit song name notification, such as displaying the jackpot song name notification image in a layer lower than the layer where the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  If the winning ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 (step S472; YES), the big hit hit song name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the winning ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S478), the big hit midway song name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the winning ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning ball number notification effect rather than the big hit song name notification, such as displaying the big hit number song name notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the winning ball number notification effect image. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  When the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S471 (step S471; YES), the jackpot song name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control for performing the operation (step S479), the big hit mid-music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. . As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of cumulative award balls than that of the jackpot music name notification, such as displaying the jackpot music name notification image on a lower layer than the layer on which the cumulative number of balls notification effect image is displayed. Control to preferentially execute the notification effect is performed.

  If a jackpot end designation command is received in step S181 shown in FIG. 58 (step S181; YES), a jackpot end notification effect time is set (step S189). In the process of step S189, for example, one of a plurality of types of jackpot end notification effect time is selected and set corresponding to the jackpot end effect waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. do it. More specifically, the same time as the jackpot end presentation waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command may be set as the jackpot end notification effect time.

  Subsequent to the process of step S189, a jackpot end notification effect control pattern is set (step S190). In the process of step S190, for example, it corresponds to the control contents of whether or not the probability change state specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the jackpot end notification effect time set in the process of step S189, etc. And what is necessary is just to select and use the pattern used as a usage pattern from the multiple types of jackpot end notification effect control patterns prepared in advance.

  After performing the process of step S190, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” (step S191), and then the effect process at the time of opening the attacker is ended. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, the ending effect process shown in FIG. 45 is executed when the next timer interruption occurs.

  FIG. 66 shows an operation for displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the prize ball number notification effect, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap. An example is shown. For example, when the number of winning balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, whether or not it is the execution period of the continuous number of times notification, the song name notification during the big hit, and the cumulative winning ball number notification effect. Regardless of this, in the process of step S818 in the award ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 60, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the operation control for executing the award ball number notification effect in the uppermost layer. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous chain reaches “5000”, the process after step S367 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 61 is executed. Is done. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in step S367 shown in FIG. 61, the reason is that the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. As shown in 66 (A), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous number of times notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot music name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  In this way, when the execution periods of the award ball number notification effect, the cumulative award ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. While the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the layer, the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in the lower layer, while the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

  FIG. 67 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap. Show. For example, when a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process of FIG. 59 is performed regardless of whether or not it is the execution period of the award ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification. In the process of step S804 in FIG. 67, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit reaches “2000”, the process after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 60 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the probability change determination notification effect is executed in the process of step S820. Operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in a layer lower than the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 62, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot music name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  In this way, when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the highest layer is used. The probability change confirmation notification effect is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in a lower layer, and the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in a lower layer.

  FIG. 68 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of error notification, prize ball number notification effect, consecutive number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap. Yes. For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, whether or not it is an execution period of a prize ball number notification effect, a continuous number of times notification, or a jackpot song name notification. First, in the process of step S143 in FIG. 44, as shown in FIG. 68A, operation control for executing error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit reaches “2000”, the process after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 60 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S819, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the layer lower than the layer where the error notification is executed. Operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 62, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot music name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  Thus, when the execution periods of error notification, prize ball number notification effect, consecutive number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), error notification is performed in the highest layer. Is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the lower layer, and the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in the lower layer.

  FIG. 69 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of error notification, probability change confirmation notification effect, consecutive number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap. . For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, regardless of whether or not it is the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot music name notification In the process of step S143 in FIG. 44, as shown in FIG. 69A, operation control for executing error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, the processing after step S803 in the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control processing in FIG. 59 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S805, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the layer lower than the layer where the error notification is executed. Operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S467 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in the drawing, operation control is performed to perform continuous channel number notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S477 in the jackpot song name notification operation control processing of FIG. 63, FIG. 69 (A). As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed for executing the jackpot music name notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed.

  In this manner, when the execution periods of error notification, probability change confirmation notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), error notification is performed in the highest layer. At the same time, a certainty change confirmation notification effect is executed in a lower layer, and a continuous change count notification and a jackpot music name notification are executed in a lower layer.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment can play a game. The effect control CPU 120 functions as a music playback means capable of playing back a music selected from a plurality of types of music. The effect control CPU 120 functions as a specific display unit capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display. Further, the effect control CPU 120 functions as a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect that makes at least a part of the specific display difficult to view or impossible to view. The effect control CPU 120 functions as a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect as a suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. To do. Then, the production control CPU 120 as the music reproducing means can reproduce a specific part that is a part of the music that is reproduced in a specific period after the music selection and is different from the head part when the music is selected. In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control as the suggestion effect execution means can execute the second suggestion effect in a manner in which the display mode after the change of the specific display is easier to recognize than the first suggestion effect, and the predetermined effect is executed. In this case, since the ratio of the second suggestion effect being executed is lower than when the predetermined effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific display after the change from being caused and the game entertainment from deteriorating. In addition, it is possible to improve the production effect when selecting music.

  In addition, it is easy to recognize what the display mode of a specific display is that the display mode of a specific display is easy to recognize. Specifically, when there are three colors of “white”, “blue”, and “red” as the display mode of the specific display, whether the display mode of one specific display of interest is “white” or “blue” It is easy to recognize whether it is “red”. In the above embodiment, the ease of recognizing the display mode of the specific display is based on the presence / absence of the notification of the display mode, but the ease of recognizing the display mode of the specific display is other than the presence / absence of the notification of the display mode. It may be due to. For example, it may be easy to recognize by the accuracy of notification, or may be easy to recognize by the confirmation of notification. It should be noted that auditory notification may be used instead of visual notification.

  In addition, the second suggestion effect has the following modes in order to easily recognize the display mode of the specific display after the change in the case where the display mode of the specific display changes compared to the first suggestion effect. As one aspect, the second suggestion presentation shows the display mode of the specific display after the change, but the first suggestion presentation does not show the display mode of the specific display after the change. The display mode of the specific display after the change in the case where the display mode of the specific display changes compared to the effect is easy to recognize. That is, it is a comparison of ease of recognition based on the presence or absence of the above-described notification. In the above embodiment, the display mode after the change is notified by the character in the small character effect, whereas the large character effect is not notified in the large character effect. It is easy to recognize the display mode of the specific display after the change in the case of changing. As another aspect, the display mode of the specific display after the change is shown in both the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, but the second suggestion effect changes when the display mode of the specific display changes compared to the first suggestion effect. The display mode of the specific display after the change in is easy to recognize. That is, it is a comparison of ease of recognition other than the presence / absence of the notification.

  The jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round gaming period, but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot period may include a period of a fanfare effect executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeated opening of the attacker, and a period of an ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game state. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the specific period is not limited to the period in the big hit gaming state, and how to determine the period is arbitrary. For example, the specific period may be a super reach production period. In this case, the music determination process shown in FIG. 47 is transformed into a process for determining the music before the super reach period or before that period, and the determined music is processed in the deformed process or the reach effect control in step S349. What is necessary is just to reproduce | regenerate in a process etc. Further, the specific period may be a probable change state, a short time state, or the like.

  Further, the specifying unit is not limited to the “rust” of the music as described above. Depending on the music, a part other than “rust” may be used as the specific part. Moreover, the specific part may be the head part of the music. That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music.

  In the above-described embodiment, there are a plurality of music determination methods when selecting music. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of music determination methods due to a plurality of types of music determination operations. For example, there may be a plurality of configurations capable of detecting the operation content according to the operation by the player using a non-contact sensor such as the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or an infrared sensor. Further, not only the example in which the selected music piece is determined when the grand prize opening is closed in the first round, but the music piece is determined according to the closing of the big winning opening in any round other than the first round. Or a composition in which music is determined according to the end of the first hit. Further, there may be only one music determination method.

  In the above-described embodiment, music can be selected in an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

  Further, the advantageous state may be during execution of a round other than the first round. Further, the advantageous state is not limited to the big hit gaming state. For example, a special gaming state such as a probability change state may be set as an advantageous state, or a big hit gaming state in which the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit gaming states is the second round number may be set as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is the second number may be an advantageous state, or the first big hit probability is higher than the second probability among the plurality of probability variation states. A probability variation state that is a probability may be an advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used. Further, it may be possible to select a music other than in an advantageous state.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control as the specific display means can display the specific display corresponding to each of the variable displays. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control as the suggestion effect execution means can execute the second suggestion effect in a mode in which it is easier to recognize the specific display of the change target than the first suggestion effect, so that the specific display of the change target is known. It can prevent that amusement interest falls.

  Note that the fact that the specific display of the change target is easy to recognize means that it is easy to recognize which specific display changes in display mode. For example, when four hold displays and one active display are displayed, it is easy to recognize which changes. In the above embodiment, the ease of recognizing the change target specific display depends on the presence or absence of the change target notification, but the ease of recognizing the change target specific display is other than the presence or absence of the change target notification. It may be due to. For example, it may be easy to recognize by the accuracy of notification, or may be easy to recognize by the confirmation of notification. It should be noted that auditory notification may be used instead of visual notification.

  Further, the second suggestion effect has the following modes in order to easily recognize the specific display of the change target when the display mode of the specific display changes compared to the first suggestion effect. As one aspect, although the change target is indicated in the second suggestion effect, but the change target is not indicated in the first suggestion effect, the display state of the specific display changes in the second suggestion effect compared to the first suggestion effect. It is easy to recognize the specific display of the change target in the case. That is, it is a comparison of ease of recognition based on the presence or absence of the above-described notification. In the above embodiment, the change target is notified by the instruction in the small character effect, but not in the large character effect. Therefore, the display mode of the specific display is changed in the small character effect compared to the large character suggestion effect. It is easy to recognize the specific display of the change target in the case of doing. As another aspect, although the change target is shown in both the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect is the specific display of the change target when the display mode of the specific display is changed as compared with the first suggestion effect. Is easy to recognize. That is, it is a comparison of ease of recognition other than the presence / absence of the notification.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 as the predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect over a plurality of variable displays, so that the game entertainment is improved over a plurality of variable displays. Can be made.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 as the specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display after the end of the predetermined effect. It can prevent that it falls.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control as the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times when the predetermined effect is being executed, and the predetermined effect is executed. In such a case, since the ratio of the suggestive effects being executed a plurality of times is higher than the case where the predetermined effects are not executed, the game entertainment can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control as the suggestion effect execution means sets the ratio at which the suggestion effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed, rather than when the predetermined effect is not executed. Because it is high, the game entertainment can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control as the suggestion effect execution unit can execute the suggestion effect in response to the execution of the predetermined effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 as the specific display means can display the specific display in a manner different from that before the predetermined effect is executed after the predetermined effect is completed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the RAM 122 functions as a holding storage unit that stores information regarding variable display that has not yet been started as holding storage information. Then, the effect control CPU 120 as the specific display means can display the hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the RAM 122 as the hold storage means as the specific display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 as the specific display means can display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the specific display, thereby improving the game entertainment. be able to.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 functions as a display unit that can display an image corresponding to a specific part of a music reproduced during a specific period when selecting a music. The production effect at the time of selection can be improved.

  Note that the image corresponding to the specifying unit may be a moving image or a still image as described above. Further, the music-corresponding image may not be displayed when the music is selected.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the ROM 121 functions as a storage unit that stores voice data divided into a plurality of pieces including voice data corresponding to a specific unit for each of a plurality of types of music. Then, the production control CPU 120 as the music reproducing means reproduces the specific portion of the music based on the audio data corresponding to the specific portion at the time of selecting the music, and connects the audio data divided into a plurality of pieces during the specific period. Is played, so the burden of data capacity can be reduced.

  Note that, as described above, the music-corresponding image data may also be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a manner divided for each music part, as in the music audio data. In this way, the burden of data capacity can be further reduced. Further, both the audio data indicating one music piece and the image data corresponding to the music piece may not be stored in a plurality of divided forms.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the adjustment status of the effect adjustment when the effect adjustment related to the game is performed according to the operation of the player. Function as. The image display device 5 as the adjustment status display means displays the adjustment status in a first state so that the adjustment status can be visually recognized regardless of the player's action, and executes a specific effect in a state different from the first state. In the second state, the adjustment status is difficult to view or cannot be viewed, and the adjustment status can be displayed based on the player's action until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The adjustment status of the production adjustment can be displayed according to the player's request, and the game entertainment can be improved. In other words, in the gaming state during the super reach production, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary, and the volume according to the player's request can be suppressed while suppressing the reduction in the production effect of the super reach production. The situation display image VL can be displayed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The specific effect is an effect that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state. For this reason, while suppressing the fall of the production effect about a super reach production, the volume condition display image VL can be displayed according to a player's request, and the interest property of a game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 (I) and 55 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position not covered by the decorative pattern at the time when the fluctuation is stopped. The sound volume can be adjusted while not obstructing the visual recognition of the game result.

  Further, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period from the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player, so that the volume state display image VL can be displayed to the minimum necessary. . Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, but as the state of either the period before the execution of the super reach effect or the period after the execution of the super reach effect Also good. Further, the first state may be at least one of a period before execution of the super reach effect in one change or a period after execution of the super reach effect in one change. It is good also as the state of the period which performs the super reach production in the change of times. Further, the second state may be a special state that tends to be an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. This special state is a probability change state or a short time state. In addition, the special state may be a state in which the game ball does not win the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, or the state is frequently changed from the first mode in which it is difficult to win to the second mode in which winning is easy.

  In addition, the display of the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment is started in accordance with the operation of the player's stick controller 31A before the transition from the gaming state other than during the super reach effect to the gaming state during the super reach effect. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the state to the second state, that is, when the super-reaching effect is being performed but the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation, the player's motion is detected or shifted Since the display of the volume status display image VL is extended until the predetermined period has elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be extended and displayed for a predetermined period even after the super reach effect is being produced. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment started just before the start of the super reach production from being terminated halfway at the start timing of the super reach production, and the display of the volume status display image VL is erased midway. You can prevent the uncomfortable feeling of being done. Moreover, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 31A again immediately after the start of the super reach effect, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  In addition, the display of the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment is started in accordance with the player's operation of the stick controller 31A before the game state during the super reach production shifts to the game state other than during the super reach production. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the state to the first state, that is, when the super reach production is finished and the game state is not during the super reach production, but the predetermined period has not passed since the operation, Since the display of the volume status display image VL is continued even after the transition to the first state, the process of erasing the display of the volume status display image VL when a predetermined period has elapsed can be eliminated. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to omit a useless process of erasing the volume status display image VL once when a predetermined period has elapsed and starting display again. In addition, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling that the display of the volume state display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 functions as a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control as the notification effect executing means notifies the first notification effect of notifying the magnitude of the value acquired during the specific period and the second value of notifying the value acquired during the special period as the notification effect. The notification effect can be executed, and since the priority order of the first notification effect and the second notification effect is made different, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 as the notification effect executing means can execute the third notification for notifying that the special gaming state is entered as the notification effect, and the priority of the third notification is higher than the first notification. Further, the effect control CPU 120 as the notification effect executing means can execute the fourth notification that notifies the number of times of being controlled in the advantageous state in the special period as the notification effect, and the first notification is prioritized over the fourth notification. The degree is high. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control as a notification effect execution means can perform the 5th alert | report which alert | reports the information regarding the other effect performed in a specific period as a alert | report effect, and is 1st alert | report rather than a 5th alert | report. High priority. According to any one of these configurations, appropriate notification can be executed.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control as the notification effect executing means can execute the sixth notification that notifies whether or not the special value is given in the specific period as the notification effect, and until the sixth notification is executed. You may restrict | limit execution of 2nd alerting | reporting. In such a configuration, it is possible to execute notification in accordance with the production situation.

  In addition, at least one of various notifications may be executable during the period from the control to the advantageous state to the control to the normal state. In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the period from the control to the advantageous state to the control to the normal state.

  In addition, the layer allocated to each of 1st alerting | reporting-6th alerting | reporting is arbitrary. Different layers may be assigned for each notification, and among various notifications, there may be a plurality of notifications to which a common layer is assigned.

  Moreover, you may assign arbitrary layers also about alerting | reporting of the music name currently selected and alerting | reporting regarding a volume condition display. Further, for example, the display layer of the image data at the time of music selection shown in FIG. 49B may be 3 as Z value, between 2 and 3, or between 1 and 2. Further, the layer of the image at the time of music selection shown in FIG. 49B and the image after the music determination shown in FIG. 49C may be changed. That is, the priority order of image display related to music may be different before and after the music is determined.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to play a game. The effect control CPU 120 functions as specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display. Further, the effect control CPU 120 functions as a concealment unit that changes the specific display between a concealment state and a non-concealment state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 functions as a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests a change in the specific display mode. And, when the specific display is in the concealed state, the suggestion effect is executed, and when the specific display is in the non-hidden state after that, the specific display can be displayed in a mode different from the state before the concealed state, Amusement interest can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the RAM 122 functions as a holding storage unit that stores a variable display that has not been started yet as a holding storage. Then, the effect control CPU 120 as the specific display means can display the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the RAM 122 as the hold storage means as the specific display, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 as the specific display means can further display the variation corresponding display corresponding to the already started variation display as the specific display. Interest can be improved.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the above embodiment, since the concealment effect ends after the execution timing “the change”, the hold display and the active display do not change after the concealment effect ends, but may change after the concealment effect ends. For example, the active display change effect can be executed twice or more, and at least one of the execution timings may be set after the end timing of the concealment effect so that the active display changes after the concealment effect ends. Further, the hold display or the active display may be changed after the concealment effect is ended by advancing the end timing of the concealment effect.

  In the above embodiment, the character effect is executed at most once during the concealment period, but the character effect may be executed a plurality of times during the concealment period. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the character effect is executed, if another hold display determined at the time of winning is already present, it is determined that the character effect is not executed without determining whether to execute using the random value. Even if another hold display determined at the time of winning when the character effect is executed already exists, the presence / absence of execution using a random value may be determined.

  Note that the plurality of character effects may be of the same type or different types. That is, a small character effect may be executed twice or more during one concealment period, a large character effect may be executed twice or more during one concealment period, or during one concealment period. Each of the small character production and the large character production may be executed once.

  Further, in a mode in which the character effect can be executed a plurality of times during the concealment period, the character effect is more likely to be executed multiple times when the concealment effect is executed than when the concealment effect is not executed. Good. There may be a plurality of types of concealment execution periods. Further, when the execution period is a concealment effect having a long execution period, the character effect may be executed more than once compared to when the execution period is a short concealment effect.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold, whether or not to execute a final display color or a concealment effect, whether or not to execute a character effect, and execution timing are determined separately. , At least two or more may be determined simultaneously. For example, whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold, the final display color, and the execution timing of the change effect such as hold may be determined at once using, for example, a large table. Further, whether to execute the concealment effect, whether to execute the character effect, and the execution timing of the character effect may be determined at once using, for example, a large table. Alternatively, all may be determined at once using, for example, a large table.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold is determined when the execution of the change effect such as the hold is determined, but the execution timing of the change effect such as the hold is determined when the execution of the change effect such as the hold is determined. For example, it may be determined whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold at the position after the shift when the shift is performed. The same applies to the character production.

  In the above embodiment, the change effect such as hold is executed during variable display, but the change effect such as hold may be executed during shift instead of or in addition to variable display. The same applies to the character production.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the determination rate of whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold when the hold display due to the current winning is the hold display before the last three is always constant, but the change such as hold depending on some condition The determination ratio of whether or not the performance is performed may be varied. For example, similarly to the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the concealment effect, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the change effect such as the hold may be varied depending on the display result, and to the variable category similar to the determination ratio of the final display color Accordingly, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the change effect such as the hold may be varied. The same applies to the determination ratio of whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold when the hold display by winning this time is the hold display before the last 4 pieces.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute a change effect such as a hold is determined for the hold display due to the current winning, but instead of or in addition to the hold display due to the current winning, the hold display before the current winning is displayed. Whether or not to execute a change effect such as hold may be determined. Moreover, you may cancel, for example, the execution presence / absence of the change effect such as the hold already determined before the execution.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a hold display is made into three colors, white, blue, and red, the display mode of a hold display is not limited to this. For example, other three colors different from at least one color from white, blue, and red may be used, or two or more colors may be used. Moreover, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to the active display. Further, there may be a display mode dedicated to active display that is not displayed as the hold display.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the change of a display mode is one time at most about a certain hold display, you may make it change twice or more. The same applies to the active display. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display aspect of the hold display added to the start winning memory | storage display area 5H is one type, there may be two or more types of initial display colors.

  Further, in the above embodiment, only one hold display determined at the time of winning when the change effect such as hold is executed exists in the start winning storage display area 5H, but a plurality of hold displays may exist. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when a change effect such as a hold is executed, if another hold indication determined at the time of winning is already present, it is determined that the change effect such as a hold is not executed without determining whether to execute using a random value. However, even if another on-hold display determined at the time of winning is already present when a change effect such as on-hold is executed, the presence / absence of execution using a random value may be determined.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the determination rate of execution of the concealment effect is varied according to the display result, the determination rate of whether the concealment effect is performed may be varied according to the variation category. In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the character effect is determined after determining whether or not to perform the concealment effect. However, the execution ratio of the concealment effect may be determined after determining whether or not the character effect is performed. For example, the determination ratio of whether or not the character effect is performed may be varied according to the display result, and the determination ratio of whether or not the concealment effect is performed may be varied depending on whether or not the character effect is performed.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute a large character effect is determined at the time of winning a prize. For example, instead of or at the time of winning a prize, whether or not to execute a large character effect may be determined at the start of variation. When determining whether or not to execute a large character effect at the start of variation, whether or not to execute a large character effect may be varied according to the variation pattern. The same applies to the small character production.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the concealment effect is implement | achieved by the display in the image display apparatus 5, the implementation | achievement method of an concealment effect is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the display on the image display device 5, a concealment effect may be realized by a movable accessory. Further, a concealment effect may be realized by moving the image display device 5 so that the start winning storage display area 5H is hidden behind the accessory.

  In the above embodiment, the concealment effect is executed by lottery, but may be executed periodically using the RTC circuit 126, for example.

  In the above-described embodiment, the concealment effect makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the hold display and the active display, but it may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize part or all of the action effect and the action effect effect. That is, it may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize the small character effect and the large character effect.

  In the above embodiment, the concealment effect makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the hold display and the active display, but the concealment effect only needs to make it difficult or impossible to visually confirm the hold display.

  In addition, the aspect which makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize a hold display, an active display, etc. is not limited to what hides a hold display or an active display. It may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize the hold display or the active display by making the hold display itself small, translucent, transparent, or deleted.

  Further, the large character effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 26 or FIG. For example, like the large character effect shown in FIG. 26, the change object and the display mode after the change are not notified at the stage before the change, the background effect, the group effect, the effect by the movable accessory, the button effect, the effect by the decorative pattern Etc. In addition, as in the large character effect shown in FIG. 30A, in the stage before the change, the change object is not notified but the display state after the change is notified, the background effect, the group effect, the effect by the movable accessory, the button An effect, an effect by a decorative design, and the like may be used.

  Similarly, the small character effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 27 and 30B. For example, as in the small character production shown in FIG. 27, the stage production before the change, the change target and the display mode after the change are notified, the background production, the group production, the production by the movable accessory, the button production, the production by the decorative design. Etc. In addition, as in the small character effect shown in FIG. 30B, in the stage before the change, the display effect after the change is not notified but the change target is notified, the background effect, the group effect, the effect by the movable accessory, the button An effect, an effect by a decorative design, and the like may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is described as an error notification corresponding to a magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. did. On the other hand, as abnormalities, in addition to the above-described radio wave abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, radio wave abnormalities, front door opening abnormalities, payout mechanism abnormalities, illegal prize winning abnormalities at the big prize opening, and the lower plate are full. There may be an abnormality and the like may be detected using an abnormality detection sensor group or the like. And about these abnormalities, the priority should just be respectively set with respect to other alerting | reporting similarly to the error alerting | reporting in the said embodiment. In that case, the priority order may be set in consideration of the severity and the like for each type of abnormality.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect was demonstrated as what alert | reports the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit as a specific period. On the other hand, the specific period may be a period other than the big hit such as one round or one minute. With such a configuration, for example, a prize ball number notification effect can be executed at a suitable timing in accordance with a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball passes through a big winning opening.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball notification effect has been described as notifying the cumulative number of prize balls that have been paid out as a prize ball during a big hit during a consecutive period as a special period. On the other hand, the special period may be a period other than during continuous chaining, such as one day or one week. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect at a suitable timing in accordance with the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by passing the game ball through the big prize opening, the difference in the continuous rate, etc. it can.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the probability change confirmation alert | report was demonstrated as an example of the alerting | reporting regarding a state, it is not restricted to this. For example, informing a player that a game ball is allowed to pass through a specific area, or informing the player that a game ball is allowed to pass through the specific area in a mode in which a big hit is determined by the game ball passing through the predetermined area. , Notification that the game ball has passed the predetermined area, notification by the probabilistic promotion effect, notification by the round number promotion effect, notification of promotion regarding the ST number or the short time number, notification regarding the consecutive chain within the hold, the remaining ST number or the short time number Information about numbers may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the priority order is determined by setting the Z value for each notification image. On the other hand, for the priority of each notification, for example, error notification is executed preferentially over the probability change confirmation notification effect, and error notification is executed preferentially over the winning ball number notification effect, while error notification and probability change are performed. When the confirmation notification effect and the prize ball number notification effect are executed simultaneously, the priority order of each notification is determined according to the combination of notifications executed simultaneously, such as the probability change confirmation notification effect is preferentially executed over the error notification. It may be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute notification according to a combination of notifications executed simultaneously.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches “5000” or “10000” by winning the final count of the final round, the cumulative winning ball number notification effect is in the ending effect. Will be executed. However, when probability variation control is performed after the end of the ending effect, the cumulative award ball number notification effect is not performed during the fanfare effect when the next big hit occurs without executing the cumulative award ball number notification effect during the ending effect. May be executed. In addition, instead of the above, at the start of the first round of the next jackpot, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed, or when the first winning is made in the first round of the next jackpot, A ball number notification effect may be performed. With such a configuration, even if the time for the ending effect is short, the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect can be suitably executed.

  Similarly, when the probability variation control is not performed after the end of the ending effect, similarly, the cumulative prize ball is not displayed during the fanfare effect when the next big hit occurs without executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect during the ending effect. The number notification effect may be executed, or when the first winning of the first round of the next jackpot or when the first winning is made in the first round of the next jackpot, the cumulative prize number notification effect is performed. May be. When the probability variation control is terminated without the next big hit or when the high opening control is terminated, the cumulative award ball number notification effect is executed when the probability variation control or the high opening control is terminated. It may be. When the probability change control is not performed after the end of the ending effect, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be executed when the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is performed.

  In the above embodiment, when a so-called over-winning occurs in the final round, a notification effect related to the over-winning may be executed during the ending effect, or the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is displayed. When performed, a notification effect related to over winning may be executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the total winning ball number notification effect for notifying the total winning ball number acquired in the big hit gaming state and the short time state in the continuous chain may be executed during the big hit. And also in such embodiment, the priority degree with respect to another alerting | reporting should just be set about the total prize ball number alerting | reporting effect. With such a configuration, even when the total prize ball number notification effect and other notifications are executed simultaneously, each notification can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, regardless of whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the jackpot promotion effect is completed in the process of step S361 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. However, before executing such processing, it is determined whether or not a jackpot promotion effect is executed, and if the jackpot promotion effect is executed, in step S361 On the other hand, in the case where the process is executed and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the process after step S362 may be executed without executing the process of step S361. With such a configuration, even when the jackpot promotion effect is not executed, the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect can be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000” and “10000”. Explained. On the other hand, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect has a larger number of prize balls than “10000” such as “5000”, “10000”, “20000”, “30000”,. It may also be executed when the is acquired. With such a configuration, attention to the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be continued.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the prize ball number alerting | reporting effect is being performed, it demonstrated that the cumulative prize ball number alerting effect is not performed. On the other hand, even if the prize ball number notification effect is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a period before and after the prize ball number notification effect is executed. And the execution periods of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may not overlap. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute both the award ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the volume status display image VL indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed. However, in addition to the volume status display image VL, the display screen of the image display device 5 and the like. A luminance status display image indicating the adjustment status of the luminance adjustment may be displayed. Alternatively, only the luminance status display image may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46 and the temporary display process shown in FIG. 53 may be changed to a process that enables display of the volume status display image VL and the luminance status display image. Further, instead of the volume status display image VL, for example, a mode status display image indicating a mode status which is the execution frequency of the hold change notice may be displayed. Further, the mode status display image may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the luminance status display image.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the volume status display image VL is erased and cannot be viewed, but the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a form that is difficult to view. Good. For example, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a semi-transparent display mode or displayed in a very small reduced display mode. Moreover, you may make it alert | report that a sound volume adjustment is always possible. For example, you may make it alert | report by the telop display in a variable display effect that volume adjustment is always possible. Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the description effect display in a variable display effect that volume adjustment is always possible. Note that the execution of the telop display and the explanation effect display is not limited to the variable display, and may be possible in a customer waiting state, a big hit game state, or the like.

  In the above embodiment, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 54 (C) to (H) unless requested by the player during the super reach production. However, in the big hit gaming state, the volume status display image VL may not be displayed unless requested by the player. In this case, the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46 and the temporary display process shown in FIG. 53 may be modified so as to be executed during the big hit. For example, instead of determining whether or not the super reach effect is being produced in the volume status display process, determining whether or not the big hit effect is being executed, changing each operation flag or the like into an operation flag corresponding to the big hit time, etc. Thus, the volume status display process can be executed during the big hit. The same applies to the temporary display process. Further, the temporary display process may be modified as a process included in the attacker opening effect process shown in FIG. For example, the temporary display process may be modified as a process executed between any of steps S184 to S188, or immediately before and after. In addition, when performing an ending effect display, you may make it display the volume condition display image VL on the image display apparatus 5 also about an ending effect period. According to such a modification, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and the fun of the game can be improved. .

  Further, the detection control based on the music selection during the big hit may be prioritized over the adjustment status detection control. In other words, the production adjustment may be impossible during the music selection. This is particularly effective when an operation for music selection and an operation for production adjustment are performed by the same operation means.

  As in the first embodiment, the second suggestion effect such as the small character effect is more easily recognized than the first suggestion effect such as the large character effect. When the predetermined effect such as the concealment effect is executed, the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed is made lower than when the predetermined effect is not executed, as in the second embodiment. , When selecting a song, it may be executed in connection with making it possible to play a specific part such as a chorus that is a part of a piece of music that is played during a specific period after the selection of the music and is different from the head part. .

  Here, in relation to the execution, for example, the production control according to the first embodiment and the production control according to the second embodiment are simultaneously executed, as well as the first implementation. Executing production control according to the second embodiment is included as part of the production control according to the embodiment.

  First, as an example of simultaneously performing the effect control according to the first embodiment and the effect control according to the second embodiment, for example, in a specific period after a predetermined effect such as a concealment effect ends, Any music piece may be selected as long as the music piece selected from among the kinds of music pieces is reproduced, and the music piece is selected in a period corresponding to the execution period of the predetermined effect such as the concealment effect. Then, the second suggestion effect such as the small character effect can be executed in a mode in which the display mode after the change of the specific display such as the hold display or the active display can be recognized more easily than the first suggestion effect such as the large character effect. When the predetermined effect is executed, the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed may be lower than when the predetermined effect is not executed. Further, at the time of music selection, a specific part such as a chorus that is a part of the music played during a specific period after the music selection and is different from the head part may be made reproducible.

  According to such an embodiment, the music can be selected in a period corresponding to the execution period of the predetermined effect such as the concealment effect, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the hold display is performed rather than when the predetermined effect is not executed. Since it is difficult to execute the second effect such as the small character effect in a form in which it is easy to recognize the display form after the change of the specific display such as the active display or the active display, the player can concentrate on selecting the music.

  Next, as an example of performing the effect control according to the second embodiment as a part of the effect control according to the first embodiment, for example, an effect for selecting a song may be a hold display or an active display. What is necessary is just to make it the predetermined | prescribed effect which makes at least one part of a specific display difficult to visually recognize or invisible. And what is necessary is just to reproduce | regenerate the music selected from multiple types of music in the specific period after the effect which selects a music as a predetermined effect is complete | finished. Then, it is possible to execute the second suggestion effect such as the small character effect in a mode in which the display mode after the change of the specific display such as the hold display and the active display is easier to recognize than the first suggestion effect such as the large character effect. When the effect of selecting the music is executed, the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed may be lower than the case where the effect of selecting the music is not executed. Further, at the time of music selection, a specific part such as a chorus that is a part of the music played during a specific period after the music selection and is different from the head part may be made reproducible.

  According to such an embodiment, when an effect for selecting a song as a predetermined effect is executed, a change after a specific display such as a hold display or an active display is performed, compared to a case where an effect for selecting a song is not executed. Since it is difficult to execute the second effect such as the small character effect in a mode in which the display mode is easy to recognize, the player can concentrate on selecting the music.

  The specific period after the end of the predetermined effect may be a variable display period in which the predetermined effect is executed, or may be a period after the variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed. .

  When the period during variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed is set as the specific period, for example, the super reach effect may be executed corresponding to the specific period. According to such an aspect, the possibility that the super reach effect can be executed can be definitely notified by executing the effect of selecting the music. Further, in such an embodiment, even if an effect of selecting a song is executed, if the selected song may not be played back, the effect of selecting the song is executed, so that the super reach is performed. It can be suggested that the production is executed.

  In the case where a part or all of the variable display after the variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed is set as the specific period as the period after the variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed, the specific period is, for example, The super reach production may be executed with variable display. According to such an aspect, by performing the effect of selecting the music, it is possible to predeterminably notify the possibility that the super reach effect will be executed in the variable display after the variable display. . Further, in such an embodiment, even if an effect of selecting a song is executed, if the selected song may not be played, the effect of selecting the song is executed, so that the variable It can be suggested that the super reach effect is executed by the variable display after the display.

  When the variable display result of the variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed is “big hit”, the variable display result of the variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed is a period after the variable display in which the predetermined effect is executed. The big hit gaming state controlled by becoming “big hit” may be the specific period. According to such an aspect, it is possible to definitely notify that the variable display result is “big hit” by executing the effect of selecting music. Further, in such an embodiment, even if an effect of selecting a song is executed, if the selected song may not be played back, the effect of selecting the song is executed, so that variable display is possible. It can be suggested that the result is a “big hit”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the hold data of the first special figure game and the hold data of the second special figure game are digested in the winning order without distinguishing, but the second reservation information may be preferentially digested. Good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to those having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10. Although also shown in (B), it is a concept including a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be three or more types. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that provides only a probable big hit as the big hit type is shown, but a gaming machine that includes a non-probable big hit as the big hit type may be used.

  In the above embodiment, a mode in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating “0” to “8” and symbols indicating “−” are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed has been described. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and among the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results May be included. In addition, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is executed using only one type of special symbols may be used. As variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked. That is, the repeated display of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. Even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. Also good. The same applies to variable display of other symbols.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it is made to control to a big hit game state based on having displayed the big hit symbol in the 1st special symbol display apparatus 4A and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B, it controls to a big hit game state The mode to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of the second start prize opening or inside the second start prize opening, and the game state may be controlled based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific area. .

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode, such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, one change pattern designation is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a command is transmitted has been shown, a change pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 shows the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before reaching, such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream and the presence or absence of a slip effect, in the first command. A command may be transmitted, and in the second command, a command indicating a variation time and a variation mode after reaching reach, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control board 12 side may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, the second command is sent after a predetermined period of time has passed. You may do it. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table, and the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table based on the random value extracted in the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. In this example, the random number determination process is executed, and the presentation control board 12 receives the judgment result determined in the main board 11 and executes the prefetching notice effect based on the received judgment result. The execution mode of the notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the production control board 12 stores a random value determination table, and the production board 8 is extracted from the main board 11 by transmitting the random number itself from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The random value itself may be received, the random value determination process may be performed with reference to the random value determination table based on the received random value, and the pre-reading notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process Good. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12. Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the determination process of the random number values, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the production control board 12 receives a random number value, determines whether or not to win a jackpot, and if it is a big jackpot, determines the type of jackpot, and based on the random value, the main board 11 You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation | variation category determined by (1). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

  In addition, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or changing the update range of the random numbers.

  In addition, for example, to a gaming machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recorded information on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. In addition, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It is not necessarily stored in the table format. That is, determination values to be compared with the extracted random number values may be stored together in the ROM 101, but may be stored in a distributed manner at a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. Alternatively, a mathematical expression or a program that outputs a result when the extracted random number value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by Applicable. For example, a slot machine that can simultaneously display a plurality of special displays corresponding to each of the games to be executed in the future in a specific period, such as always or in a chance zone, or each of the already executed games The present invention may be applied to a slot machine or the like that can simultaneously display a plurality of corresponding special displays.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first state is, for example, a gaming state or a customer waiting state other than during the super reach effect and a state in which no error is being displayed, and is a second state in which the specific effect is executed. It is not limited to this. For example, in a slot machine, the first state may be a gaming state or a customer waiting state other than a continuous production performed between a plurality of games and a state in which no error is displayed, and the second state in which a specific production is executed. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may have a special effect such as a congratulatory effect, a promotion effect, a V-winning notification, etc. in the pachinko machine 1, and in a slot machine, an AT notification, an ART notification, a 1G continuous notification of a jackpot, a continuous notification of a jackpot Etc.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device or the like in advance. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading determination is performed on the sub-side. You may make it do.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the light emitter unit, game effect lamp, and decoration LED Various rendering operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal process includes “probability variation”, and the probability variation control condition is established based on the fact that the determination result of the jackpot type is “probability variation”. The description has been made assuming that the game state is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation control condition is established based on the fact that the probability change attacker provided at the predetermined position in the game area has detected the game ball that won the big prize opening by the probability variation detection switch, The gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability changing state. The winning hole of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times, and is closed when the number of round games executed is other than the predetermined number of times. The open state may not be changed while the state is maintained. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Frame for gaming machines 4A ... 1st special symbol display device 4B ... 2nd special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5H ... Start winning memory display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... normal variable winning ball apparatus 7 ... special variable winning ball apparatus 8 ... speaker 9 ... lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... production control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 16 ... accessory control board 17 ... Movable accessory 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First start port switch 22B ... Second start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display controller 126 ... RTC circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A music playback means capable of playing back a music selected from a plurality of types of music;
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect that makes at least part of the specific display difficult to view or impossible to see;
As suggested directing suggesting a change in the specific display of the display mode, the first suggested effect, a different second suggested effect and, capable of executing suggested effect execution means and said first suggested effect,
With
The music playback means is capable of playing back a specific part that is a part of a music that is played back during a specific period after the music is selected and is different from the top part at the time of music selection.
The second suggests Starring unloading is, Ri your Te said first suggested performance as compared to recognize the display mode after the change of the specific display easy Kuna',
The specific display means includes a case where the specific display is displayed in a normal mode and a case where the specific display is displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode.
Wherein when the predetermined demonstration is executed when a specific display is displayed in a conventional manner, rather than when the predetermined effect is not executed when the specified display is displayed in a normal manner, the second gaming machine and wherein the ratio of suggested effect is performed is not low.

Images